Top Banner
Model No. KX-TDA30 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark.
264

Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Apr 27, 2018

Download

Documents

Dang Thu
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Model No. KX-TDA30

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later

Hybrid IP-PBX

Installation Manual

SD Logo is

a trademark.

Page 2: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

System ComponentsSystem Components Table

Category Model No. Description

Main Unit KX-TDA30 Main Unit

Trunk Cards KX-TDA3180 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)

KX-TDA3182 3-Port DID Card (DID3)

KX-TDA3183 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT2)

KX-TDA3188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1)

KX-TDA3193 4-Port Caller ID Card (CID4)

KX-TDA3280 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2)

KX-TDA3283 1-Port BRI Card (BRI1)

KX-TDA3450 4-Channel SIP Trunk Card (SIP-GW4)

KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4)

KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4)

Extension Cards KX-TDA3171 4-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC4)

KX-TDA3172 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)

KX-TDA3173 4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC4)

KX-TDA3174 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)

KX-TDA3470 4-Channel VoIP Extension Card (IP-EXT4)

Other Cards KX-TDA3105 Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

KX-TDA3161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

KX-TDA3162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)

KX-TDA3166 8-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO8)

KX-TDA3168 Extension Caller ID Card (EXT-CID)

KX-TDA3191 2-Channel Message Card (MSG2)

KX-TDA3192 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (SVM2)

KX-TDA3194 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (ESVM2)

KX-TDA3196 Remote Card (RMT)

Optional SD MemoryCards

KX-TDA3820 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade

KX-TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to EnhancedVersion

2 Installation Manual

System Components

Page 3: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Category Model No. Description

Cell Stations(CSs)

2.4 GHz KX-TDA0141 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Portor a DLC Card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

KX-TDA0151 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Portor a DLC Card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

DECT KX-TDA0141CE 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Portor a DLC Card for DECT Portable Station

KX-TDA0158CE 8-Channel High-density Cell Station Unit Using a SuperHybrid Port or a DLC Card for DECT Portable Station

DECT 6.0 KX-TDA0155 DECT 6.0 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a SuperHybrid Port or a DLC Card for DECT 6.0 Portable Sta-tion

KX-TDA0158 DECT 6.0 8-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a SuperHybrid Port or a DLC Card for DECT 6.0 Portable Sta-tion

Proprietary Equipment KX-A236 Additional AC Adaptor

KX-A228 S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable

KX-T30865 Doorphone

KX-T7765

Equipment CompatibilityCompatible Panasonic Proprietary TelephonesThe PBX supports the following telephones:• Digital proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-DT300 series)• Analogue proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-T7700 series)• IP proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series)• Portable stations (e.g., KX-TCA355, KX-TCA256, KX-TD7690)• DSS consoles (e.g., KX-DT390)• Single line telephones (e.g., KX-T7710)

Incompatible Panasonic Proprietary TelephonesThe PBX does not support the following telephones:• KX-T30800 series proprietary telephones and DSS consoles• KX-T61600 series proprietary telephones and DSS consoles• KX-T123200 series proprietary telephones and DSS consoles• KX-TD7500 DECT portable station

Note• For the equipment (e.g., Add-on Key Module, USB Module, Headset*1) that can be connected to a

particular telephone, refer to the telephone’s manual.• For other equipment that can be connected to the PBX, refer to "1.2.2 System Connection Diagram".*1 The KX-T7090 headset can be connected to the KX-T7000, KX-T7200, KX-T7300, KX-T7400, and KX-T7500 (except for

KX-T7560/KX-T7565) series telephones.

Installation Manual 3

System Components

Page 4: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Notice• Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate

telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.• Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.

Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over

connected networks

Note• Some optional service cards and features are not available for certain countries/areas. Consult your

certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-TDA30NE) is omitted unless necessary.

Safety NoticesPlease observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and preventdamage to property.The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:

WARNING This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.

List of Abbreviations• APT ® Analogue proprietary telephone• DPT ® Digital proprietary telephone• IP-PT ® IP proprietary telephone• PS ® Portable station• PT ® Proprietary telephone• SLT ® Single line telephone

4 Installation Manual

System Components

Page 5: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Important Safety InstructionsWhen using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the riskof fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub,

in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from

lightning.• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Installation Manual 5

Important Safety Instructions

Page 6: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Important InformationSAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

SAFETY REQUIREMENTSFor All Telephone Equipment• Do not install the product in any other way than described in relevant manuals.• For safety reasons, do not physically modify the product or any optional equipment.• The product may only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel.• To prevent possible fire or electric shock, do not expose the product to rain or moisture.• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.• Do not place the product on an unstable surface, as a fall may cause serious internal damage.• The product should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply specified on the product label.

If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.• For safety purposes some products are equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed outlet,

please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate the product where the power cord may be

stepped on or tripped on.• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the product. Only qualified personnel should

service the product. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks.Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock.

• Unplug the product from the wall outlet and have it serviced by qualified service personnel in the followingcases:a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.b. If liquid has been spilled into the product.c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.d. If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that are

explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damageand may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.f. If product performance deteriorates.

For the PBX• If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return

the unit to your dealer.• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the PBX with the AC power cords of machines located

nearby.Use protectors to prevent the cables from being stepped on. Failure to do so may cause fire or electricshock.

• Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. Theseconditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorisedPanasonic Factory Service Centre.

• Danger of explosion exists if a battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalenttype recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the PBX.

6 Installation Manual

Important Information

Page 7: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metalplates in the wall.

• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.• Do not insert objects of any kind into this product through its slots and openings, as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spillliquid of any kind on or in the product.

CAUTION

SAFETY REQUIREMENTSFor All Telephone Equipment• Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean

with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzene or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners oraerosol cleaners.

• The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C) and vibration, andshould not be exposed to direct sunlight.

For the PBX• When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power

connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnectthe telecom connection.

• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is located nearthe equipment and is easily accessible.

• The SD Memory Card poses a choking hazard. Keep the SD Memory Card out of reach of children.• Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it

from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blockedby placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product should neverbe placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a sealedenvironment unless proper ventilation is provided.

For the Cell Station2.4 GHz Cell Station (Except for KX-TDA0151CN)Medical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if theyare adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency rangeof 2401 MHz to 2480 MHz, and the power output level can range from 0.004 W to 0.4 W.) Do not use the unitin health care facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health carefacilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

2.4 GHz Cell Station (Only for KX-TDA0151CN)Medical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if theyare adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency rangeof 2401 MHz to 2480 MHz, and the output peak power level is less than 0.16 W.) Do not use the unit in healthcare facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care facilitiesmay be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

DECT Cell StationMedical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if theyare adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency rangeof 1881 MHz to 1898 MHz, and the output peak power level is less than 0.25 W.) Do not use the unit in health

Installation Manual 7

Important Information

Page 8: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

care facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care facilitiesmay be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

DECT 6.0 Cell StationMedical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if theyare adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency rangeof 1920 MHz to 1930 MHz, and the output peak power level is less than 0.12 W.) Do not use the unit in healthcare facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care facilitiesmay be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

SECURITY REQUIREMENTSIn order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure todo so may result in:• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.

What is User Information?User Information is defined as:1. Information stored on the SD Memory Card

Phonebook data, user IDs, system settings data, passwords (User/Administrator/Installer), PersonalIdentification Numbers (PINs), etc.

2. Information sent from the PBX to a PC or other external device:Phone call data (including telephone numbers of outside parties), call charge data, etc.

Requirements1. The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all customer data. It can be

easily removed and taken away from the PBX by a third party. Therefore, do not allow unauthorised accessto prevent data leakage.

2. Always make backups of data stored on the SD Memory Card. For details, refer to "2.6.2 Utility—FileTransfer PC to PBX (SD Card)" and "2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC" in the PCProgramming Manual.

3. To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.4. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend:

a. Keeping the password secret.b. Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.c. Changing your password regularly.

5. Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.a. Make a backup of data stored on the SD Memory Card.b. Using an SD formatter, format the SD Memory Card so that information cannot be retrieved from it.

6. To prevent data leakage, render the SD Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.7. When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or other external device, the confidentiality of that

information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or other external device,ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or rendering it physicallyunusable.

Notice

SAFETY REQUIREMENTSFor All Telephone Equipment• Read and understand all instructions.

8 Installation Manual

Important Information

Page 9: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

For the PBX• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as fluorescent

lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the PBX.• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the trunks:

a. Disconnect the PBX from all trunks.b. Connect known working SLTs to those trunks.c. Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the trunk that the SLT is connectedto. Contact your telephone company.If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the trunksuntil it has been serviced by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre

Installation Manual 9

Important Information

Page 10: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

PrecautionFor users in the United KingdomFOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three-pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuseis fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a ratingof 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If youlose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse covercan be purchased from your local Panasonic dealer.

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE AC OUTLET IN YOUR PREMISES, THEN THEFUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS ADANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT-OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMPSOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult aqualified electrician.

WARNINGThis appliance must be earthed.

IMPORTANTThe wires in the mains lead are coloured as follows:Green-and-yellow: EarthBlue: NeutralBrown: LiveAs the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the colouredmarkings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.The wire that is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug that ismarked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.The wire that is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or colouredBLACK.The wire that is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L orcoloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover.

The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines, and a payphone should not be connected as anextension.

10 Installation Manual

Precaution

Page 11: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose of makingoutgoing calls to the BT emergency services.

During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. This is not a faultand we advise you not to call the Fault Repair Service.

For users in the European Union only

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean thatused electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with generalhousehold waste.For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please takethem to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Di-rectives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resour-ces and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment whichcould otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, pleasecontact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where youpurchased the items.Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with nationallegislation.

For business users in the European UnionIf you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or sup-plier for further information.

Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European UnionThese symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complieswith the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

For users in Germany only• Machine Noise Information Ordinance, 3rd GPSGV: The highest sound pressure level is 70 dB (A) or less

according to EN ISO 7779.• This equipment is not for use at video display work stations according to BildscharbV.

For users in New Zealand only• This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111’ Emergency Service.• The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted

that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsementof the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurancethat any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a differentmake or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.

• This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds forwhich it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.

Installation Manual 11

Precaution

Page 12: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

• Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s Telepermit requirements are dependent on theequipment (PBX) associated with this modem. In order to operate within the limits for compliance withTelecom’s Specifications, the associated PBX equipment shall be set to ensure that modem calls areanswered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing.

• Using the toll services of a company other than Telecom:If the PBX is set up to use the toll services of a company other than Telecom, the telephone numbersdialled from the Caller Display listings within the PBX will be directed through the toll services of the othercompany because the telephone numbers include the toll access digit and area code digit. A toll chargemay be incurred. Please check with the toll carrier concerned.

• IMPORTANT NOTICEUnder power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separatetelephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.

• APPLICABLE ONLY TO TELECOM CUSTOMERS WHO HAVE AUTOMATIC ACCESS TO OTHERCARRIERS FOR TOLL CALLSWhen calling back a number from the Caller ID list, all numbers prefixed with "0 + AREA CODE" will beautomatically forwarded to your toll carrier. This includes numbers in your local calling area. The zero +area code should either be removed when calling back local numbers, or check with your toll carrier thata charge will not be levied.

• All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law.This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition,the principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of thepersonal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used, and what is disclosed to anyother party.

For users in Australia only• No External TRC Terminal is provided due to an Internal Link between PE and TRC.

For users in Taiwan only• Lithium batteries can be found in the circuit boards of the main board and optional cards of the PBX.

Note• When disposing of any of the above products, all batteries must be removed. Follow the applicable

laws, regulations, and guidelines in your country/area regarding disposal of batteries.• When replacing a battery, use only the same battery type, or an equivalent recommended by the battery

manufacturer.

NoticeRegarding removing or replacing a battery in the circuit board, consult your dealer.

12 Installation Manual

Precaution

Page 13: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

IntroductionThis Installation Manual is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX,KX-TDA30. It provides instructions for installing the hardware, and programming the PBX using theMaintenance Console.

The Structure of this ManualThis manual contains the following sections:Section 1 System OutlineProvides general information on the PBX, including the system capacity and specifications.Section 2 InstallationDescribes the procedures to install the PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installingthe optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on systemexpansion and peripheral equipment installation is included.Section 3 Guide for the Maintenance ConsoleExplains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the Maintenance Console.Section 4 TroubleshootingProvides information on the PBX and telephone troubleshooting.

About the Other ManualsAlong with this Installation Manual, the following manuals are available:Feature GuideDescribes all basic, optional and programmable features of the PBX.PC Programming ManualProvides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PC.PT Programming ManualProvides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PT.User ManualProvides operating instructions for end users using a PT, SLT, PS, or DSS Console.

About the software version of your PBXThe contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of thismanual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see "How do I confirm the software version of the PBXor installed cards?" in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) of the PC Programming Manual, or "[190]Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference" in the PT Programming Manual.

Trademarks• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

Panasonic Corporation is under licence.• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Installation Manual 13

Introduction

Page 14: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Table of Contents1 System Outline .......................................................................................171.1 System Highlights ...........................................................................................................181.1.1 System Highlights ...........................................................................................................181.2 Basic System Construction ...........................................................................................201.2.1 Main Unit ........................................................................................................................201.2.2 System Connection Diagram ..........................................................................................211.3 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................231.3.1 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................231.4 Specifications ..................................................................................................................251.4.1 General Description ........................................................................................................251.4.2 Characteristics ................................................................................................................271.4.3 System Capacity ............................................................................................................28

2 Installation ..............................................................................................332.1 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................342.1.1 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................342.2 Installation of the PBX ....................................................................................................362.2.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................362.2.2 Names and Locations .....................................................................................................372.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers ..........................................................................................382.2.4 Installation of the SD Memory Card ...............................................................................412.2.5 Frame Earth Connection ................................................................................................432.2.6 Backup Battery Connection ............................................................................................442.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards ............................................................462.2.8 Types of Connectors ......................................................................................................562.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core .................................................................................................582.2.10 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30) ............................................................................................592.2.11 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor) ...........................................................................................622.2.12 Surge Protector Installation ............................................................................................662.3 Information about the Trunk Cards ...............................................................................692.3.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA3180) ..........................................................................................692.3.2 LCOT2 Card (KX-TDA3183) ..........................................................................................712.3.3 CID4 Card (KX-TDA3193) ..............................................................................................722.3.4 DID3 Card (KX-TDA3182) ..............................................................................................732.3.5 E1 Card (KX-TDA3188) ..................................................................................................742.3.6 BRI2 Card (KX-TDA3280) ..............................................................................................782.3.7 BRI1 Card (KX-TDA3283) ..............................................................................................812.3.8 IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480) .........................................................................................842.3.9 SIP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3450) .......................................................................................862.3.10 SIP-DSP4 Card (KX-TDA3451) ......................................................................................882.4 Information about the Extension Cards ........................................................................892.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171) .............................................................................................892.4.2 SLC4 Card (KX-TDA3173) .............................................................................................912.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172) .............................................................................................922.4.4 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA3174) .............................................................................................932.4.5 IP-EXT4 Card (KX-TDA3470) ........................................................................................942.5 Information about the Other Cards ...............................................................................962.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161) ............................................................................................962.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162) ............................................................................................992.5.3 ECHO8 Card (KX-TDA3166) ........................................................................................1022.5.4 MSG2 Card (KX-TDA3191) ..........................................................................................1032.5.5 SVM2 Card (KX-TDA3192) ..........................................................................................104

14 Installation Manual

Table of Contents

Page 15: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.6 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA3194) ........................................................................................1052.5.7 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA3168) ......................................................................................1062.5.8 MEC Card (KX-TDA3105) ............................................................................................1072.5.9 RMT Card (KX-TDA3196) ............................................................................................1082.6 Connection of Extensions ............................................................................................1092.6.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ........................1092.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions ..........................................................................1112.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .....................................................1142.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection .......................................................................1212.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations .......................................................................1222.7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................1222.7.2 Procedure Overview .....................................................................................................1242.7.3 Site Planning ................................................................................................................1262.7.4 Before Site Survey .......................................................................................................1302.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590 ..................1352.7.6 After Site Survey ..........................................................................................................1392.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX ...........................................................................1402.7.8 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................1502.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations ...................................................................1542.8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................1542.8.2 Procedure Overview .....................................................................................................1552.8.3 Site Planning ................................................................................................................1572.8.4 Before Site Survey .......................................................................................................1612.8.5 Site Survey ...................................................................................................................1642.8.6 After Site Survey ..........................................................................................................1682.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX ...........................................................................1692.8.8 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................1762.9 Connection of DECT 6.0 Portable Stations .................................................................1812.9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................1812.9.2 Procedure Overview .....................................................................................................1832.9.3 Site Planning ................................................................................................................1852.9.4 Before Site Survey .......................................................................................................1892.9.5 Site Survey ...................................................................................................................1942.9.6 After Site Survey ..........................................................................................................1982.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX ...........................................................................1992.9.8 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................2082.10 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External

Relays .............................................................................................................................2112.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External

Relays ..........................................................................................................................2112.11 Connection of Peripherals ...........................................................................................2212.11.1 Connection of Peripherals ............................................................................................2212.12 Power Failure Connections ..........................................................................................2252.12.1 Power Failure Connections ..........................................................................................2252.13 Starting the PBX ............................................................................................................2272.13.1 Starting the PBX ...........................................................................................................227

3 Guide for the Maintenance Console ...................................................2313.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................2323.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................2323.2 PC Connection ..............................................................................................................2333.2.1 PC Connection .............................................................................................................2333.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console ....................................................................2363.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console .........................................................236

Installation Manual 15

Table of Contents

Page 16: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................2394.1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................2404.1.1 Installation ....................................................................................................................2404.1.2 Connection ...................................................................................................................2414.1.3 Operation ......................................................................................................................2434.1.4 Using the Reset Button ................................................................................................2454.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log .......................................................................................246

5 Appendix ...............................................................................................2495.1 Revision History ............................................................................................................2505.1.1 PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxx ..........................................................................2505.1.2 PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx ..........................................................................2515.1.3 PSMPR Software File Version 2.2xxx ..........................................................................2525.1.4 PSMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx ..........................................................................2535.1.5 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx ..........................................................................2545.1.6 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx ..........................................................................255

Index............................................................................................................257

16 Installation Manual

Table of Contents

Page 17: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Section 1

System Outline

This section provides general information on the PBX,including the system capacity and specifications.

Installation Manual 17

Page 18: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.1 System Highlights

1.1.1 System HighlightsNetworking Features

This PBX supports the following networking features:

TIE Line ServiceA TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effectivecommunications between company members at different locations.

Virtual Private Network (VPN)VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line.

QSIG NetworkQSIG is a protocol based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network of two ormore connected PBXs.

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) NetworkThe PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted intoIP packets and sent through this network. Automatic Rerouting of Calls via a Private IP Network to PublicTrunks is also available, in case of network difficulties.

Built-in Small Call Centre FeaturesAn incoming call distribution group can be used as a small call centre with the following features:

Queuing FeatureWhen a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additionalincoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the QueuingTime Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

Log-in/Log-outIncoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually. Whilelogged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls aftercompleting the last call (Wrap-up).

VIP CallIt is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groupsand the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) FeaturesConnecting a PC to a DPT, or connecting a CTI server to this PBX allows function of the PC, PBX and extensionto be integrated so that, for example, detailed caller information can be taken from a database and displayedon the PC as a call arrives, or the PC can dial numbers for the extension automatically.

Voice Mail FeaturesThis PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well as DPT (Digital)Integration.

18 Installation Manual

1.1.1 System Highlights

Page 19: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Parallelled Telephone FeaturesBy connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX withoutadding additional extension cards.

Parallel ModeAn SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. The SLTshares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.

EXtra Device Port (XDP) ModeAn SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX. Unlike parallelmode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Digital XDPA DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid Port of the PBX.Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number.

Portable Station (PS) FeaturesPSs can be connected to this PBX. It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS canalso be used in parallel with a wired telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephoneis the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone.

PC Phone/PC Console FeaturesThis PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced featurescombining telephone and PC, such as the ability to display detailed caller information, including a photograph,on the screen of the PC when a call is received, or to dial a telephone number automatically just by selectinga name.

Hospitality FeaturesThis PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel-type environment. Extensions corresponding toguest rooms can be "checked in" or "checked out" by a designated hotel operator, who can also check or setwake-up calls, and print out records of guest charges.

Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) FeaturesBy just installing an optional voice message card in the PBX, simple answering machine services can beprovided.

Cellular Phone Features (KX-TDA3920 required)This PBX supports the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX. Cellular phonescan be treated as extensions within the PBX, and paired with wired telephones in Cellular Phone XDP ParallelMode.

Installation Manual 19

1.1.1 System Highlights

Page 20: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.2 Basic System Construction

1.2.1 Main UnitThe main unit is equipped with 4 Super Hybrid Ports. For system expansion, optional service cards can beinstalled, and an additional AC adaptor can also be connected.

Construction of Main Unit

Main BoardFront Cover Cable Cover

20 Installation Manual

1.2.1 Main Unit

Page 21: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

External Sensor/

External Relay Device

PC

USB

KX-DT300 KX-DT300

Doorphone & Door Opener

BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)

Pager/

Speaker

Batteries

Voice Processing

System

KX-T7636/

KX-T7633

KX-DT346/

KX-DT343

Remote PC

PC

Trunk (Telephone Company Lines)

Analogue/E1/BRI

PBX

SLT

CSPS

Wireless Phone

Fax Machine

PC

USB

KX-T7600 KX-T7600

APT DSS Console

DSS ConsoleDPT

ISDN Telephone

Amplifier

SLT

DPT

Printer

Router

Private IP Network

PC

IP Softphone

CTI Server

PC

PC

IP-PT

ITSP*1

Network

DCE*2

(e.g., ADSL Modem)

*1 ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider*2 DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment

Installation Manual 21

1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

Page 22: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

AC Cord & AC Adaptor*1

Station Message

Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC

ISDN BRI LineISDN BRI Line

(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)

ISDN BRI Line

(Digital Trunk)

DLC8(KX-TDA3172)

DLC4(KX-TDA3171)

ECHO8(KX-TDA3166)

EXT-CID(KX-TDA3168)

MEC(KX-TDA3105)

Telephone

Company

Radio

Amplifier Pager/Speaker

CTI Server

Batteries

Main Board

RMT(KX-TDA3196)

Analogue

Trunk

LCOT2(KX-TDA3183)

CID4(KX-TDA3193)

LCOT4(KX-TDA3180)

SIP-DSP4(KX-TDA3451)

SIP-GW4(KX-TDA3450)

DID3(KX-TDA3182)

BRI2(KX-TDA3280)

BRI1(KX-TDA3283)

SLC8(KX-TDA3174)

SLC4(KX-TDA3173)

SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

DPH4(KX-TDA3161)

DPH2(KX-TDA3162)

Doorphone & Door Opener

External Sensor/

External Relay Device

MSG2(KX-TDA3191)

SVM2(KX-TDA3192)

PCDSS

ConsoleDPT

Voice

Processing

SystemPT-interface CS PS

SLT WirelessPhone

Fax Machine

APT DPTDSS Console

4 Super Hybrid Ports*2

PT-interface CS PS

PC

Voice

Processing

System

E1 LineE1 Line(Digital Trunk)(Digital Trunk)

E1 Line(Digital Trunk)

E1(KX-TDA3188)

PC

LAN

IP-EXT4(KX-TDA3470)

LAN

IP-PT IP Softphone

PC

LAN

CTI Server

Private

IP NetworkRouter

IP-GW4(KX-TDA3480)

ITSP

Network

WAN

ESVM2(KX-TDA3194)

KX-DT300/KX-T7600DPT

KX-DT300/KX-T7600DPT

KX-DT346/KX-DT343/KX-T7636/KX-T7633DPT

KX-DT300/KX-T7600DPT

KX-DT300/KX-T7600DPT

KX-DT346/KX-DT343/KX-T7636/KX-T7633 DPT

DCE(e.g., ADSL

Modem)

*1 In addition to the supplied AC adaptor, an additional AC adaptor can be connected to the PBX.*2 The PBX has 4 Super Hybrid Ports pre-installed.

22 Installation Manual

1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

Page 23: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.3 Optional Equipment

1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Model No. Model Name Description MaximumQuantity

KX-TDA3105 Memory Expansion Card(MEC)

Memory expansion card to increase sys-tem data storage space, double the num-ber of DPTs (using Digital XDP connec-tion), and enable Broadcasting, displaylanguage selection for VM Menu, and CallBilling for Guest Room features. To be in-stalled in the MEC slot.

1

KX-TDA3161 4-Port Doorphone Card(DPH4)

4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones, 4door openers or external relays, and 4 ex-ternal sensors.

1

KX-TDA3162 2-Port Doorphone Card(German Type) (DPH2)

2-port doorphone card for 2 German-typedoorphones, 2 door openers, 4 externalsensors, and 4 external relays.

1

KX-TDA3166 8-Channel Echo Cancel-ler Card (ECHO8)

8-channel card for echo cancellation dur-ing conferences.

1

KX-TDA3168 Extension Caller ID Card(EXT-CID)

Sends Caller ID signals to extension ports. 1

KX-TDA3171 4-Port Digital ExtensionCard (DLC4)

4-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSSconsoles, a Voice Processing System(VPS), and PT-interface CSs.

1

KX-TDA3172 8-Port Digital ExtensionCard (DLC8)

8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSSconsoles, a VPS, and PT-interface CSs.

2

KX-TDA3173 4-Port Single Line Tele-phone Extension Card(SLC4)

4-port extension card for SLTs. 1

KX-TDA3174 8-Port Single Line Tele-phone Extension Card(SLC8)

8-port extension card for SLTs. 2

KX-TDA3180 4-Port Analogue TrunkCard (LCOT4)

4-port analogue trunk card with 2 powerfailure transfer (PFT) ports.

3

KX-TDA3182 3-Port DID Card (DID3) 3-port DID analogue trunk card. 2

KX-TDA3183 2-Port Analogue TrunkCard (LCOT2)

2-port analogue trunk card with 2 powerfailure transfer (PFT) ports.

3

KX-TDA3188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1) 30-channel E1 trunk card. ITU-T standardcompliant.

1

KX-TDA3191 2-Channel Message Card(MSG2)

2-channel message card. 2

Installation Manual 23

1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Page 24: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Model No. Model Name Description MaximumQuantity

KX-TDA3192 2-Channel SimplifiedVoice Message Card(SVM2)

2-channel simplified voice message cardfor Built-in Simplified Voice Message fea-ture.

2

KX-TDA3194 2-Channel SimplifiedVoice Message Card(ESVM2)

2-channel simplified voice message cardfor Built-in Simplified Voice Message fea-ture. Also supports MSG card features.

4

KX-TDA3193 4-Port Caller ID Card(CID4)

4-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (withCall Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on the LCOT4 card.

3

KX-TDA3196 Remote Card (RMT) Analogue modem card for remote commu-nication with the PBX. ITU-T V.90 support.To be installed in the RMT slot.

1

KX-TDA3280 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2) 2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with1 power failure transfer (PFT) port. EU-RO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

3

KX-TDA3283 1-Port BRI Card (BRI1) 1-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card. EU-RO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

3

KX-TDA3450 4-Channel SIP TrunkCard (SIP-GW4)

4-channel SIP gateway card. Compliantwith RFC 3261, 3262, 3264, 3311, and4028 protocols, and ITU-T G.729A/B andG.711 CODEC methods.

1

KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSPCard (SIP-DSP4)

4-channel VoIP DSP card. To be mountedon the SIP-GW4 card.

1

KX-TDA3470 4-Channel VoIP Exten-sion Card (IP-EXT4)

4-channel VoIP extension card. Compliantwith Panasonic proprietary protocol, andITU-T G.729A and G.711 CODEC meth-ods.

1

KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP GatewayCard (IP-GW4)

4-channel VoIP gateway card. This cardalso enables CTI communication and sys-tem programming via a LAN. Compliantwith VoIP H.323 V.2 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.723.1, and G.711 CODEC meth-ods. CSTA Phase 3 protocol compatible.

1

KX-TDA3820 SD Memory Card for Soft-ware Upgrade

Optional SD Memory Card to upgradePSMPR file version 1.xxxx PBX. For moredetails, refer to the SD Memory Card In-stallation/Upgrade Guide.

1

KX-TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Soft-ware Upgrade to En-hanced Version

Optional SD Memory Card to use en-hanced features. For more details, refer tothe SD Memory Card Installation/UpgradeGuide.

1

KX-A236 Additional AC Adaptor AC adaptor and AC cord for system ex-pansion.

1

24 Installation Manual

1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Page 25: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.4 Specifications

1.4.1 General DescriptionSwitching Non-blocking

AC Adaptor AC Input • Panasonic PSLP1244: 100 V AC to 240 V AC; 1.5 A; 50 Hz/60Hz

• Panasonic PSLP1434: 110 V AC to 240 V AC; 1.35 A; 50 Hz/60 Hz

DC Output 40 V; 1.38 A (55.2 W)

DC Input • DC IN 1: 40 V; 1.38 A (55.2 W)• DC IN 2: 40 V; 1.38 A (55.2 W)

External Battery +36 V DC (+12 V DC ´ 3, recommended maximum capacity is 14Ah)

Maximum Power Failure Tolerance 300 ms (without using backup batteries)

Memory Backup Duration 7 years

Dialling Trunk Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 ppsTone (DTMF) Dialling

Extension Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 ppsTone (DTMF) Dialling

Connectors Trunk RJ45/RJ11 (2 wire) ´ each trunk port

Extension RJ45/RJ11 (4 wire) ´ each extension port

Paging Output 1 conductor jack

External MOH (Mu-sic on Hold) Output

1 conductor jack

Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP

Ring Frequency 20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)

Trunk Loop Limit 1600 W maximum

Operating Envi-ronment

Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C

Humidity 10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)

Conference Call Trunk From 10 ´ 3-party conference call to 4 ´ 8-party conference call

Music on Hold 1 port (Level Control: -11 dB to +11 dB in 1 dB steps)Selectable Tone/External Music Source port

Paging Internal Level Control: -15 dB to +6 dB in 3 dB steps

External 1 port (Volume Control: -15 dB to +15 dB in 1 dB steps)

Serial InterfacePort

RS-232C 1 (maximum 115.2 kbps)

USB 1

Installation Manual 25

1.4.1 General Description

Page 26: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Extension Connection Cable SLT 1-pair wire (T, R)

DPT 1-pair wire (D1, D2) or2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)

APT 2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)

PT-interface CS 1-pair wire (D1, D2)

PT-interface CS (High-density) 4-pair wire (D1, D2)

DSS Console and Add-on Key Mod-ule

1-pair wire (D1, D2)

Dimension 275 mm (W) ´ 376 mm (H) ´ 117 mm (D)

Weight (when fully mounted) Under 3.5 kg

26 Installation Manual

1.4.1 General Description

Page 27: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.4.2 CharacteristicsTerminal Equipment Loop Limit • PT: KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DPT: 90 W; all other DPTs/APTs:

40 W• SLT: 600 W including set• Doorphone: 20 W• PT-interface CS: 65 W

Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 W minimum

Maximum Number of Extension In-struments per Line

1. for PT or SLT2. by Parallel or eXtra Device Port connection of a PT and an SLT3. by Digital eXtra Device Port connection of 2 DPTs and an SLT

Ring Voltage 75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load

Trunk Loop Limit 1600 W maximum

Hookswitch Flash/Recall TimingRange

24 ms to 2032 ms

BRI Cards Internal ISDN Mode Supply Voltage: 40 VPower Supply: 4.5 W per 1 line, 5 W per 2 linesPower Supply Method: Phantom Power Supply

Door Opener Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

External Relay Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

External Sensor Current Limit Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH4 or DPH2 cardand must be grounded through the DPH4 or DPH2 card. For the con-nection diagram, refer to "2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)" or "2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)". The PBX detects input from thesensor when the signal is under 100 W.

Paging Terminal Impedance 600 W

MOH Terminal Impedance 10 000 W

Installation Manual 27

1.4.2 Characteristics

Page 28: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1.4.3 System CapacityMaximum Number of Trunks

The PBX supports the following number of trunks.

Line Type Maximum Number (Channels)

LCOT + BRI + DID 12

VoIP (H.323) 4

VoIP (SIP) 8

E1 30

Maximum Terminal EquipmentThe following number of items of terminal equipment can be supported by the PBX. Depending on the typeand total number of items of equipment to be connected, the MEC card may be required. To determine whetheror not the MEC card is necessary, refer to "MEC Card Calculation".

Terminal Equipment Type Without Additional AC Adap-tor With Additional AC Adaptor

SLT 24*1 24*1

KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series/KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT andKX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DSSconsole

Total 24 Total 48

KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DPT 24 48

KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DSSconsole

4 4

KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT 24 24

Other DPT/Other DSS console and APT Total 4 Total 24

Other DPT 4 24

Other DSS console 4 4

APT 4 4

IP-PT 4 4

DSS console 4 4

VPS 4 ports (1 VPS)*2 4 ports (1 VPS)*2

SLT, PT, DSS console, and VPS 28 56

CS 4 8

High-density CS 2 4

PS 28 28

28 Installation Manual

1.4.3 System Capacity

Page 29: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Terminal Equipment Type Without Additional AC Adap-tor With Additional AC Adaptor

Doorphone 4 4

Door Opener/External Relay 4 4

External Sensor 4 4

*1 This number includes all ports of SLC cards, regardless of whether an SLT is connected or not.*2 A maximum of 4 ports (8 channels) of a single VPS can be connected to the PBX.

NoteDevices connected to the PBX that exceed the system capacity will not function.

Installation Manual 29

1.4.3 System Capacity

Page 30: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

MEC Card CalculationCalculate the MEC figure from the type and total number of items of equipment to be connected. If the MECfigure exceeds 28, you need to install an MEC card. Note that you also need to connect an additional ACadaptor in this case.

MEC Card Calculation

Equipment Type MEC Figure

PT KX-DT300 series DPT/KX-DT300 seriesDSS console/KX-T7600 series DPT/KX-T7600 series DSS console

1

KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT 1

Other DPT/Other DSS console 1

APT 1

IP-PT 1

Pre-installed 4 Super Hybrid Ports 4

Extension Card*1 SLC4 4

SLC8 8

CS (1 unit) 0

High-density CS (1 unit) 0

VPS (1 port) 1

ISDN Telephone 0

*1 Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the MEC figures.

Calculation Example

Equipment Type MEC Figure

KX-T7600 series DPT 16 units 16

SLC4 1 card 4

SLC8 1 card 8

VPS 4 ports 4

Total 32

The total MEC figure is 32. As this exceeds 28, you need to install an MEC card and connect an additional ACadaptor for this configuration.

30 Installation Manual

1.4.3 System Capacity

Page 31: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

AC Adaptor Selection (Without BRI Extension Port)You must connect an additional AC adaptor in any of the following conditions:• A total of more than 4 APTs, DPTs (except KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series/KX-T7560/KX-T7565), and

DSS consoles (except KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series) are connected.• More than 4 CSs are connected.• An MEC card is required to support a configuration with a total MEC figure exceeding 28.• Both the DID3 card and the SLC4 or DLC4 card are installed in any of Slots 2 to 4.

NoteFor how to connect an AC adaptor or additional AC adaptor, refer to "2.13.1 Starting the PBX".

AC Adaptor Selection (With BRI Extension Port)If the PBX has a BRI extension port, you must connect an additional AC adaptor in any of the followingconditions:• A total of more than 4 APTs, DPTs (except KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series/KX-T7560/KX-T7565), and

DSS consoles (except KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series) are connected.• More than 4 CSs are connected.• An MEC card is required to support a configuration with a total MEC figure exceeding 28.• Both the DID3 card and the SLC4 or DLC4 card are installed in any of Slots 2 to 4.• The total load figure exceeds 32.

NoteFor how to connect an AC adaptor or additional AC adaptor, refer to "2.13.1 Starting the PBX".

Load Figure Calculation

Equipment Type Load Figure

PT KX-DT300 series DPT/KX-DT300 series DSSconsole/KX-T7600 series DPT/KX-T7600 ser-ies DSS console

0

KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT 0

Other DPT/Other DSS console 4

APT 4

IP-PT 0

Pre-installed 4 Super Hybrid Ports 0

Extension Card SLC4 0

SLC8 0

CS (1 unit) 4

High-density CS (1 unit) 8

VPS (1 port) 0

ISDN Telephone 1*1

*1 If the connected ISDN telephone has an external power source, its load figure is 0.

Installation Manual 31

1.4.3 System Capacity

Page 32: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

AC Adaptor CapacityThe following load figures can be supported.

Connected AC Adaptor Maximum Load Figure

Supplied AC Adaptor only 32

Supplied AC Adaptor and Additional AC Adaptor 96*1

*1 If the load figure exceeds 96, it cannot be supported by the KX-TDA30. In this case, use the KX-TDA100 with M-Type Power SupplyUnit (PSU-M), or the KX-TDA200 with either PSU-M or L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L).

Calculation Example

Equipment Type Load Figure

Other DPT/Other DSS console (exceptKX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series/KX-T7560/KX-T7565)

4 units 16

CS 3 units 12

ISDN Telephone 5 units 5

Total 33

The total load figure is 33. As this exceeds 32, you need to connect an additional AC adaptor.

32 Installation Manual

1.4.3 System Capacity

Page 33: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Section 2

Installation

This section describes the procedures to install thePBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installationsite, installing the optional service cards, and cabling ofperipheral equipment are provided. Further informationon system expansion and peripheral equipmentinstallation is included.

Installation Manual 33

Page 34: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.1 Before Installation

2.1.1 Before InstallationPlease read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the PBX and terminalequipment.Be sure to comply with all applicable laws, regulations, and guidelines.

Safety Installation InstructionsWhen installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire,electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at

the network interface.4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Installation PrecautionsThis PBX is designed for wall mounting only, and should be installed in a location where it is accessible forinspections and maintenance.To prevent malfunction, noise, or discolouration, avoid installing the system in the following locations:1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C)2. Areas where sulfuric gases may be present, such as near thermal springs.3. Areas where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.4. High-dust areas, or places the system may come into contact with water or oil.5. Near devices that generate high frequencies, such as sewing machines or electric welders.6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners.

(It is preferable not to install the system in the same room as the above equipment.)7. Within 1.8 m of radios and televisions. (Both the PBX and PTs should be at least 1.8 m away from such

devices).8. Locations where other objects will obstruct the area around the PBX. Be especially careful to leave at least

20 cm of space above and 10 cm to the sides of the PBX for ventilation.9. Do not stack up the optional service cards. To avoid damage to the optional service cards, always use the

extension bolts.

Wiring PrecautionsBe sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:1. Do not run unshielded telephone cables near AC power cables, computer cables, AC power sources, etc.

When running cables near other noise-generating devices or cables, use shielded telephone cables orshield the telephone cables with metal tubing.

2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the cables from being stepped on. Avoid runningcables under carpets.

3. Avoid using the same AC outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment, as noise generated bysuch equipment may hamper system performance or interrupt the system.

4. Use 2-pair telephone cables when connecting PTs.Use 1-pair telephone cables when connecting SLTs, data terminals, answering machines, computers,Voice Processing Systems, etc.

34 Installation Manual

2.1.1 Before Installation

Page 35: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5. Unplug the system from its power source when wiring, and plug the system back in only after all wiring iscompleted.

6. Mis-wiring may cause the PBX to operate improperly. Refer to "Section 2 Installation" when wiring thesystem.

7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and connectit again, or turn off the PBX using the power switch, then turn it on again.

8. For safety purposes this unit is equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed outlet, pleasehave one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.

9. Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.10. Trunks should be installed with surge protectors. For details, refer to "2.2.12 Surge Protector

Installation".

Installation Manual 35

2.1.1 Before Installation

Page 36: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2 Installation of the PBX

2.2.1 UnpackingUnpack the box and check the items below:

Main Unit 1

AC Cord 1*1

AC Adaptor 1

Screws for Wall Mounting 5

Washers for Wall Mounting 5

Mini Plug (for pager and music source) 2

SD Memory Card 1

Main Strap 1

Optional Card Label Sheet 1

*1 KX-TDA30BX is supplied with 2 types of AC cord. Please use whichever is appropriate for the country/area.

36 Installation Manual

2.2.1 Unpacking

Page 37: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.2 Names and Locations

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A. Earth TerminalB. Battery ConnectorC. DC IN 2D. DC IN 1E. Power SwitchF. SD Memory Card Slot CoverG. Reset ButtonH. System Initialise SwitchI. MOH portJ. Pager portK. Super Hybrid PortsL. RS-232C portM. USB port

Installation Manual 37

2.2.2 Names and Locations

Page 38: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.3 Opening/Closing the CoversOpening the Covers

1. Pull the slide button to the right and, holding it, slide the cable cover upwards. Then turn the cable coverslightly to remove it.

Slide Button

Cable Cover

2. Remove the three screws.

Screw

3. Holding the protrusions on both sides of the front cover, swing the cover open.

38 Installation Manual

2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers

Page 39: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Removing/Attaching the Front CoverIf you prefer, you can remove the front cover.

Removing the Front CoverHolding the front cover open at about a 45° angle, remove the front cover by pushing it in the direction of thearrow as shown below.

Attaching the Front CoverFit the front cover to the main unit as shown below, and then close the front cover.

Closing the Covers1. Close the front cover, then tighten the three screws.

Screw

Installation Manual 39

2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers

Page 40: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Attach the rear hooks on the cable cover to the main unit, then swing the cable cover closed so that thefront hooks fit in place.

Cable Cover

3. Slide the cable cover down until it locks.

40 Installation Manual

2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers

Page 41: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.4 Installation of the SD Memory Card

SD Memory Card

Slot Cover

SD Memory

Card

LED

CAUTION• The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all the customer data. It

can be easily removed and taken away from the PBX by a third party. Therefore, do not allowunauthorised access to prevent data leakage.

• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBXto fail to start when you try to restart the system.

• To prevent data leakage, render the SD Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.

Notice• Use only the SD Memory Card included with the PBX, or a Panasonic optional upgrade SD Memory

Card.• The SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the PBX before startup.

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

SD ACCESS Green SD memory card status• ON: Accessing

Installation Manual 41

2.2.4 Installation of the SD Memory Card

Page 42: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

NoteIf you need to remove the SD Memory Card:

42 Installation Manual

2.2.4 Installation of the SD Memory Card

Page 43: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.5 Frame Earth Connection1. Loosen the screw.2. Insert an earthing wire (user-supplied).3. Tighten the screw.4. Connect the earthing wire to earth.

Screw

Earthingwire

To earth

WARNING• Connect the frame of the PBX to earth.• Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to protect the PBX from the bad effects

of external noise or to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution in the case of a lightningstrike.

CAUTION• For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor

must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.• The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against external noise and lightning strikes, but it may

not be enough to protect the PBX. A permanent connection between earth and the earth terminal ofthe PBX must be made.

NoticeBe sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).

Installation Manual 43

2.2.5 Frame Earth Connection

Page 44: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.6 Backup Battery ConnectionThe backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable provide a backup power supply to allow full use of the PBXin the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup batteries automatically maintain the powerto the PBX without interruption.

User-supplied Items• Backup Batteries: VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) 12 V DC ´ 3• Back-up Battery Cable: KX-A228

WARNINGThere is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace only with thesame or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used batteriesaccording to the manufacturer’s instructions.

CAUTION• Make sure that the Back-up Battery Cable is securely fastened to both the backup batteries and the

PBX.• Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).• Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.• Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.

Note• Turn on the power switch of the PBX only after the installation of the PBX is finished and AC power is

available.• The recommended maximum capacity is 14 Ah, to maintain effective battery charge.• Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.• The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up Battery Cable

and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the backup batteries in aventilated place.

• For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual for the batteries.

Backup Power Supply DurationThe length of time that backup batteries can power the PBX varies depending on the total load figure. For howto calculate the load figure from the connected items, refer to "Load Figure Calculation".Examples

Battery Capacity Total Load Figure Backup Power Supply Duration*1

14 Ah32 9 h

96 3 h

*1 The duration may vary depending on the conditions.

44 Installation Manual

2.2.6 Backup Battery Connection

Page 45: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connecting Backup Batteries1. Turn off the power switch of the PBX.2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable to a set of 3 identical batteries.

Back-up Battery Cable

Backup Batteries (VRLA 12 V DC x 3)

Red Black

Battery Connector

Fuse

Power Switch

Installation Manual 45

2.2.6 Backup Battery Connection

Page 46: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service CardsSlot Position

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10*1

11*1

01*2

*1 Slots 10 and 11 accept only cards that do not have external ports. Therefore, these slots do not have removable cover plates.*2 Slot 01 contains the pre-installed Super Hybrid Ports. No optional service card can be installed.

Slot RestrictionsThe following table shows the slot restrictions. "ü" indicates that the slot supports the optional service card.

Card Slot Number

Type Max 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

LCOT4 3 ü ü ü

LCOT2 3 ü ü ü

DID3 2 ü ü ü

BRI2 3 ü ü ü

BRI1 3 ü ü ü

DLC4 1*1 ü ü ü

SLC4 ü ü ü

E1 1 ü ü ü

SIP-GW4 1

2

ü ü ü

IP-GW4 1 ü ü ü

IP-EXT4 1 ü ü ü

DLC8 2*2 ü ü ü

SLC8 ü ü ü

DPH4 1*3 ü ü

DPH2 ü ü

ECHO8 1 ü ü ü ü

EXT-CID 1 ü ü ü ü

46 Installation Manual

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 47: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Card Slot Number

Type Max 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

MSG2 2

4

ü ü ü ü

SVM2 2 ü ü ü ü

ESVM2 4 ü ü ü ü

*1 Only one of either the DLC4 or SLC4 card can be installed.*2 A maximum of two DLC8 cards, two SLC8 cards, or one of each card can be installed.*3 Only one of either the DPH4 or DPH2 card can be installed.

CAUTIONTo protect the main board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the main board or on the optionalservice cards. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an earthing strap.

Note• When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch of the PBX must be in the off

position.• For each card, the maximum number that can be installed in the PBX is listed in "1.3.1 Optional

Equipment".• Any card that exceeds the capacity of the PBX will be ignored.• When the PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be ignored.

Installing Optional Service Cards1. Before installing the optional service cards, cut and remove the appropriate dummy cover plates from the

main unit.

Dummy Cover Plate

CAUTIONFor safety reasons, smooth the cut edges after removing the dummy cover plates.

Installation Manual 47

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 48: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Position the card in the open slot, making sure that the tabs on the both sides of the card fit into place.Then, holding the card firmly in place, lower the rear end so that the hole of the card fits over the extensionbolt.

1

2

Extension Bolt

Optional Service Card

CAUTIONWhen installing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the main board. Doingso may result in damage to the PBX.

3. Insert the new extension bolt (included with the card) into the hole on the card, and tighten it to secure thecard.

Extension Bolt

48 Installation Manual

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 49: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4. Stick an appropriate optional card label (included) to the left side of the corresponding card.

Optional Card Label

5. Connect a cable to an appropriate port of the card.For details about pin assignments, refer to the appropriate section in "2.3 Information about the TrunkCards" and "2.4 Information about the Extension Cards".

NoteMake sure to connect cables after installing the card in the PBX, not before.

6. Repeat the procedure for other cards.A. When installing a card in Slot 07, make sure to detach the LED holder first. After installing the card,

reattach the LED holder.

Installation Manual 49

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 50: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

To detach the LED holder

LED holder

To attach the LED holder

50 Installation Manual

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 51: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

B. When installing a card in Slot 11, tighten the card using the screw included with the card, instead ofthe extension bolt.

Screw

Installation Manual 51

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 52: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Cable Handling1. Attach the strap included with the card to one of the connected cables.

Strap

2. Bind all the connected cables together using the strap.

3. Repeat the procedure for other cards.

52 Installation Manual

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 53: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4. Attach the main strap (included with the PBX) to any of the 5 rails depending on your preference.

2

1

Main Strap

Installation Manual 53

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 54: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5. Bind all the connected cables together using the main strap, and then close the cable cover. Forhow to close the cable cover, refer to "2.2.3 Opening/Closing the Covers".

Main Strap

Cable Cover

Note• For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the cables.• If you prefer, you can cut the other side of the cable cover and run the cables through that

opening. For safety reasons, smooth the cut edges.

54 Installation Manual

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 55: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Removing the Optional Service Cards1. Loosen and remove the extension bolt.

2. Holding the protrusions of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.

CAUTIONWhen removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the main board. Doingso may result in damage to the PBX.

Installation Manual 55

2.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Page 56: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.8 Types of ConnectorsConnector Type Pin Number Used for

RJ45

(Twisted pair cable)

1 8

• DPH4 (KX-TDA3161NE)• DPH2 (KX-TDA3162)• DLC4 (KX-TDA3171NE)• DLC8 (KX-TDA3172NE)• SLC4 (KX-TDA3173NE)• SLC8 (KX-TDA3174NE)• LCOT4 (KX-TDA3180NE)• LCOT2 (KX-TDA3183)• E1 (KX-TDA3188)• BRI2 (KX-TDA3280)• BRI1 (KX-TDA3283)• SIP-GW4 (KX-TDA3450)• IP-EXT4 (KX-TDA3470)• IP-GW4 (KX-TDA3480)• Super Hybrid Ports (Main Board)*1

RJ11

(Twisted pair cable)

4 1

• DPH4 (KX-TDA3161)• DLC4 (KX-TDA3171)• DLC8 (KX-TDA3172)• SLC4 (KX-TDA3173)• SLC8 (KX-TDA3174)• LCOT4 (KX-TDA3180)• DID3 (KX-TDA3182)• Super Hybrid Ports (Main Board)*2

BNC

1

2

• E1 (KX-TDA3188)

10-pin

Terminal Block

8-pin

Terminal Block81

101

• DPH4 (KX-TDA3161)• DPH2 (KX-TDA3162)

RS-232C

(Shielded cable)

6 9

1 5• Main Board

56 Installation Manual

2.2.8 Types of Connectors

Page 57: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connector Type Pin Number Used for

USB2

3

1

4

• Main Board

Mini Plug+

-

• Main Board (Pager port, MOH port)

*1 The KX-TDA30E, KX-TDA30NE, and KX-TDA30GR have the Super Hybrid Ports with RJ45 connectors.*2 Other models of the KX-TDA30 (other than the KX-TDA30E, KX-TDA30NE, and KX-TDA30GR) have the Super Hybrid Ports with

RJ11 connectors.

Installation Manual 57

2.2.8 Types of Connectors

Page 58: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite CoreA ferrite core must be attached when an RJ45 connector is connected to the SIP-GW4 or IP-EXT4 card.

Attaching to an RJ45 ConnectorFor SIP-GW4/IP-EXT4 CardsWrap the cable once around the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core 5cm away from the connector. The ferrite core is included with the card.

5 cm

58 Installation Manual

2.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core

Page 59: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.10 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)Mounting on Wooden Wall

WARNINGOnly use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the PBX.

CAUTION• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Leave at least 20 cm of space above and 10 cm to the sides

of the PBX for ventilation.• Make sure that the surface behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the

back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

Notice• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal

plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the last page of this manual) on the wall to mark the 3 screwpositions.

250 mm

130 mm

2. Install the screws and washers (included) in the wall.

Washer

Drive the screwto this position.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

Installation Manual 59

2.2.10 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)

Page 60: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

Mounting on Concrete or Mortar WallWARNING

Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the PBX.

CAUTION• Do not block the openings of the cabinet. Leave at least 20 cm of space above and 10 cm to the sides

of the PBX for ventilation.• Make sure that the surface behind the cabinet is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the

back of the cabinet will not be blocked.

Notice• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal

plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.• Be careful not to drop the cabinet.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the last page of this manual) on the wall to mark the 3 screwpositions.

250 mm

130 mm

60 Installation Manual

2.2.10 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)

Page 61: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Install three anchor plugs (user-supplied) in the wall.

Hammer Anchor Plug

8 mm

30 mm

3. Install the screws (included) in the wall.

Drive the screwto this position.

4. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

Installation Manual 61

2.2.10 Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30)

Page 62: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.11 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)Mounting on Wooden Wall

WARNINGOnly use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the PBX.

NoticeBe careful not to drop the AC adaptor.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

110 mm

2. Install the screws and washers (included) in the wall.

Washer

Drive the screwto this position.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the AC adaptor on the screw heads.

62 Installation Manual

2.2.11 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)

Page 63: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Mounting on Concrete or Mortar WallWARNING

Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the PBX.

Notice• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal

plates in the wall.• Be careful not to drop the AC adaptor.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (on the following page) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.

110 mm

2. Install two anchor plugs (user-supplied) in the wall.

Hammer Anchor Plug

8 mm

30 mm

3. Install the screws (included) in the wall.

Drive the screwto this position.

Installation Manual 63

2.2.11 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)

Page 64: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4. Hook the AC adaptor on the screw heads.

64 Installation Manual

2.2.11 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)

Page 65: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

110 mm

NoteMake sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper outputstill deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

Installation Manual 65

2.2.11 Wall Mounting (AC Adaptor)

Page 66: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.2.12 Surge Protector InstallationOverview

A massive electrical surge can be caused if lightning strikes a telephone cable 10 m above ground, or if atelephone line comes into contact with a power line. A surge protector is a device that is connected to a trunkto prevent potentially dangerous electrical surges from entering the building via the trunk and damaging thePBX and connected equipment.

To protect the system from electrical surges, we strongly recommend connecting the system to a surgeprotector that meets the following specifications:– Surge arrestor type: 3-electrode arrestor– DC spark-over voltage: 230 V– Maximum peak current: at least 10 kAAdditionally, proper earthing is very important for the protection of the system (refer to "2.2.5 Frame EarthConnection").

Many countries/areas have regulations requiring surge protection. Be sure to comply with all applicable laws,regulations, and guidelines.

Installation

CS

Trunk Trunk Trunk

Extn.

Extn. Extn. Extn.

Extn.: Extension line

Surge

Protector

Terminal

BoardPBX

Frame

EarthSLT

Earth

PT

66 Installation Manual

2.2.12 Surge Protector Installation

Page 67: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Outside Installation

CSSLT PT

(Main Building)

Trunk

Trunk

Extn.

Extn.

Extn.: Extension Line

Earth

(Another Building)

Extn. Extn.

Surge Protector

Terminal

BoardSurge

Protector

SLT

PT

PBXCS

If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:a. Install the extension wire underground.b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.

NoteThe surge protector for an extension and CS is different from that for trunks.

Installation of an Earth Rod

Trunk

PBXEarthing

Wire

Earth Rod

(Underground)

Surge Protector

Installation Manual 67

2.2.12 Surge Protector Installation

Page 68: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1. Connect the earth rod to the surge protector using an earthing wire with a cross-sectional area of at least1.3 mm2.

2. Bury the earth rod near the protector. The earthing wire should be as short as possible.3. The earthing wire should run straight to the earth rod. Do not run the wire around other objects.4. Bury the earth rod at least 50 cm underground.

Note• The above figures are recommendations only.• The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.

68 Installation Manual

2.2.12 Surge Protector Installation

Page 69: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3 Information about the Trunk Cards

2.3.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA3180)Function

4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. One CID4 card can be mounted on theLCOT4 card (refer to "2.3.3 CID4 Card (KX-TDA3193)").

To trunk

RJ45

PFT Port 1

PFT Port 2

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

NoticeThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Note• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the

PBX".• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

9 161 8

T R T R R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved

Installation Manual 69

2.3.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA3180)

Page 70: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

4 1

T R R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved

70 Installation Manual

2.3.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA3180)

Page 71: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.2 LCOT2 Card (KX-TDA3183)Function

2-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

To trunk

PFT Port 1

PFT Port 2

RJ45

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, Optional Card Label ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the

PBX".• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

9 161 8

T R T R R Ring

T Tip

– Reserved

Installation Manual 71

2.3.2 LCOT2 Card (KX-TDA3183)

Page 72: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.3 CID4 Card (KX-TDA3193)Function

4-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted onthe LCOT4 card.

CID4 Card

LCOT4 Card

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): noneUser-supplied (not included): none

NoteIf you need to remove the CID4 Card:

72 Installation Manual

2.3.3 CID4 Card (KX-TDA3193)

Page 73: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.4 DID3 Card (KX-TDA3182)Function

3-port DID analogue trunk card.

To trunk

RJ11

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, Optional Card Label ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteTo confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the PBX".

Pin AssignmentsRJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

T R

4 1

R Ring

T Tip

Installation Manual 73

2.3.4 DID3 Card (KX-TDA3182)

Page 74: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.5 E1 Card (KX-TDA3188)Function

30-channel E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard compliant.

LEDs

To NT1/Extension

To NT1/Extension

BNC (TX)

BNC (RX)

RJ45

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): noneUser-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector

Note• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the Public Switched

Telephone Network.• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to

the trunk directly.• Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot be used

simultaneously.• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B

switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the

PBX".

CAUTIONE1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

74 Installation Manual

2.3.5 E1 Card (KX-TDA3188)

Page 75: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Switch Settings

OR

OR OR

A B

For RJ45

For BNC

120Ω 75Ω

120Ω 75Ω

BNC (RX) outer conductor BNC (TX) outer conductor

J309

NC

FG

For Frame Ground Open

For Frame Ground Short

J308

FG

NCJ308

FGJ309

NC

FG

NC

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Termination Slide Select 120 W (default) or 75 W to match the connector type to be used.

A/B Slide When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk or B for exten-sion use.When using BNC connectors, make sure that A is selected.

Frame GroundShort

Short pin J308 is for BNC (TX) outer conductor, and J309 is for BNC (RX) outer con-ductor.

"NC" position: Open (default)"FG" position: Short

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 8

RX+RX-

TX-TX+

RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

RX- (-) Receive data (-)

TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

– – Reserved

Installation Manual 75

2.3.5 E1 Card (KX-TDA3188)

Page 76: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 8

TX-TX+

RX+RX-

TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

RX- (-) Receive data (-)

– – Reserved

BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 (TX+)

2 (TX-)

TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 (RX-)

2 (RX+)

RX- (-) Receive data (-)

RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication• OFF: Not synchronised• ON: Synchronised• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

RAI Red RAI signal status indication• OFF: Normal• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)

AIS Red AIS status indication• OFF: Normal• ON: Alarm

SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication• OFF: Normal• ON: Out of synchronisation

76 Installation Manual

2.3.5 E1 Card (KX-TDA3188)

Page 77: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension ConnectionThe maximum length of the extension cable that connects the E1 cards is shown below:

Diameter Maximum Distance

0.5 mm: 200 m

Installation Manual 77

2.3.5 E1 Card (KX-TDA3188)

Page 78: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.6 BRI2 Card (KX-TDA3280)Function

2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer (PFT) port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

To NT1/Extension

RJ45 (LINE 1)

RJ45 (LINE 2)

LED 1

(LINE 1)

LED 2

(LINE 2)

A B A BOR

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to

the U interface of the trunk directly.• This optional service card has 100 W of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection,

the card must be placed at the end of the bus.• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B

switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "2.12.1 Power Failure Connections".• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the

PBX".

NoticeIf the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power is supplied fromthe BRI2 card by programming the PBX accordingly.However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no power suppliedto the terminal from the BRI2 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to the power supply circuit of theBRI2 card or the terminal.

Switch SettingsSwitch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

78 Installation Manual

2.3.6 BRI2 Card (KX-TDA3280)

Page 79: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 8

TX1(+)RX2(+)

RX1(-)TX2(-)

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

– – Reserved

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

Signal Name Level [V] Function

RX2(+)TX1(+)

TX2(-)RX1(-)

1 8

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

– – Reserved

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

LINE 1 Green LINE 1 status indication:Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

LINE 2 Green LINE 2 status indication:Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

LINE LED Pattern

Layer 1 Layer 2 MasterClock LED Pattern

OFF OFF OFF 1 s

ON OFF OFF 1 s

ON ON OFF 1 s

Installation Manual 79

2.3.6 BRI2 Card (KX-TDA3280)

Page 80: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Layer 1 Layer 2 MasterClock LED Pattern

ON OFF ON 1 s

ON ON ON 1 s

Layer 1: ON (Synchronous)Layer 2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)

Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus ConnectionThe maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PBX and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) isshown below:

CAT 5: Under 1000 m

TE

Point-to-Point

Expansion

Point-to-Multipoint

Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

TE 8TE 1

CAT 5: Under 150 m

CAT 5: Under 500 m CAT 5: Under 50 m

80 Installation Manual

2.3.6 BRI2 Card (KX-TDA3280)

Page 81: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.7 BRI1 Card (KX-TDA3283)Function

1-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

To NT1/Extension

RJ45

LEDA B A B

OR

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, Optional Card Label ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to

the U interface of the trunk directly.• This optional service card has 100 W of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection,

the card must be placed at the end of the bus.• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B

switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting the

PBX".

NoticeIf the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power is supplied fromthe BRI1 card by programming the PBX accordingly.However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no power suppliedto the terminal from the BRI1 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to the power supply circuit of theBRI1 card or the terminal.

Switch SettingsSwitch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

Installation Manual 81

2.3.7 BRI1 Card (KX-TDA3283)

Page 82: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector for Trunk Use

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 8

TX1(+)RX2(+)

RX1(-)TX2(-)

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

– – Reserved

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

Signal Name Level [V] Function

RX2(+)TX1(+)

TX2(-)RX1(-)

1 8

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

– – Reserved

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

LINE 1 Green LINE 1 status indication:Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.

LINE LED Pattern

Layer 1 Layer 2 MasterClock LED Pattern

OFF OFF OFF 1 s

ON OFF OFF 1 s

ON ON OFF 1 s

82 Installation Manual

2.3.7 BRI1 Card (KX-TDA3283)

Page 83: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Layer 1 Layer 2 MasterClock LED Pattern

ON OFF ON 1 s

ON ON ON 1 s

Layer 1: ON (Synchronous)Layer 2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)

Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus ConnectionThe maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PBX and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) isshown below:

CAT 5: Under 1000 m

TE

Point-to-Point

Expansion

Point-to-Multipoint

Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

TE 8TE 1

CAT 5: Under 150 m

CAT 5: Under 500 m CAT 5: Under 50 m

Installation Manual 83

2.3.7 BRI1 Card (KX-TDA3283)

Page 84: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.8 IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480)Function

4-channel VoIP gateway card. This card also enables CTI communication and system programming via a LAN.Compliant with VoIP H.323 V.2 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.723.1, and G.711 CODEC methods. CSTAPhase 3 protocol compatible.

To private IP network/

LAN/CTI Server

RJ45

LEDs

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, CD-ROM (including documentation for webprogramming) ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.• This optional service card can be connected to PCs on a LAN via a CTI server to provide third party

call control CTI.The operating system of the PC or CTI server required for third party call control depends on your CTIapplication software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

• For CTI communication and system programming, the firmware (not LPR software) of the card mustbe version 1.400 or later. For details about the firmware version, refer to the documentation for theIP-GW4 card.

• For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4 card, refer to the documentationfor the IP-GW4 card. To programme the IP-GW4 card, use the web programming designed for theIP-GW4 card.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting thePBX".

84 Installation Manual

2.3.8 IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480)

Page 85: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 8

TPO+TPO-

TPI+TPI-

TPO+ O Transmit data+

TPO- O Transmit data-

TPI+ I Receive data+

TPI- I Receive data-

– – Reserved

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

ON LINE Green On-line status indication• ON: On-line mode• OFF: Off-line mode• Flashing: Maintenance mode

NoteIf the LINK indicator is OFF, the ON LINE indicator will also be OFF.

ALARM Red Alarm indication• ON: Alarm• OFF: Normal

LINK Green Link status indication• ON: Normal Connection• OFF: Connection Error

DATA Green Data transmission indication• ON: Data transmitting• OFF: No data transmitted

Installation Manual 85

2.3.8 IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480)

Page 86: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.9 SIP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3450)Function

4-channel SIP gateway card. Compliant with RFC 3261, 3262, 3264, 3311, and 4028 protocols, and ITU-T G.729A/B and G.711 CODEC methods.

To LAN

RJ45

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

LEDs

Set the switch to

the "ON" position.

OF

FO

N

SW1

OF

FO

N

SW1

OF

F123IN

IDIP-SW

To

Data Circuit Terminating

Equipment (DCE)

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 2, Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, CD-ROM (including documentationfor web programming) ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a

Ferrite Core"• For programming instructions and other information about the SIP-GW4 card, refer to the

documentation for the SIP-GW4 card. To programme the SIP-GW4 card, use the web programmingdesigned for the SIP-GW4 card.

• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "2.13.1 Starting thePBX".

Switch SettingsSwitch Usage and Status Definition

SW1 Set the switch at "ON" position before installing the card in the PBX.

DIP-SW Keep all DIP switches at default "OFF" positions.

86 Installation Manual

2.3.9 SIP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3450)

Page 87: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 8

TX+TX-

RX+RX-

TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

RX- (-) Receive data (-)

– – Reserved

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

RUN Green Card status indication• ON: Normal• OFF: Power Off

VoIP Green Voice data transmission status indication• ON: Registered on a VoIP server• OFF: Not registered on a VoIP server• Flashing: During a conversation

PPP Green Indication of whether a PPPoE session has been established with theIP telephone company• ON: PPPoE session established• OFF: PPPoE session not established• Flashing: PPPoE session establishment in process

WAN LINK Green Indication of link status with connected devices (e.g., ADSL modem)• ON: Normal connection• OFF: Connection error

100 Green Indication of transmission speed with connected devices (e.g., ADSLmodem)• ON: Operating at 100 Mbps• OFF: Operating at 10 Mbps• Flashing: Data transmitting (only when operating at 100 Mbps)

LAN LINK Green Indication of link status with connected devices (e.g., PC, hub)• ON: Normal connection• OFF: Connection error

100 Green Indication of transmission speed with connected devices (e.g., PC, hub)• ON: Operating at 100 Mbps• OFF: Operating at 10 Mbps• Flashing: Data transmitting (only when operating at 100 Mbps)

Installation Manual 87

2.3.9 SIP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3450)

Page 88: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.3.10 SIP-DSP4 Card (KX-TDA3451)Function

4-channel VoIP DSP card. To be mounted on the SIP-GW4 card.

SIP-DSP4 Card

SIP-GW4 Card

Screws

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Screws ´ 2User-supplied (not included): none

88 Installation Manual

2.3.10 SIP-DSP4 Card (KX-TDA3451)

Page 89: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.4 Information about the Extension Cards

2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)Function

4-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a Voice Processing System (VPS), and PT-interfaceCSs.

To extension

RJ45

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

NoticeThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

NoteFor details about connecting the CS, refer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

9 161 8

D2 D1 D2 D1 D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved

Installation Manual 89

2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)

Page 90: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

4 1

D2 D1 D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved

90 Installation Manual

2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)

Page 91: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.4.2 SLC4 Card (KX-TDA3173)Function

4-port extension card for SLTs.

To extension

RJ45

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

NoteThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

9 161 8

R T R T T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

4 1

R T T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

Installation Manual 91

2.4.2 SLC4 Card (KX-TDA3173)

Page 92: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172)Function

8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, a VPS, and PT-interface CSs.

To extension

RJ45

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

NoticeThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

NoteFor details about connecting the CS, refer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

9 161 8

D2 D1 D2 D1

25 3217 24

D2 D1 D2 D1 D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

4 1

D2 D1 D1 Data port (High)

D2 Data port (Low)

– Reserved

92 Installation Manual

2.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172)

Page 93: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.4.4 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA3174)Function

8-port extension card for SLTs.

To extension

RJ45

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector or RJ11 connector

NoteThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

9 161 8

R T R T

25 3217 24

R T R T T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

4 1

R T T Tip

R Ring

– Reserved

Installation Manual 93

2.4.4 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA3174)

Page 94: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.4.5 IP-EXT4 Card (KX-TDA3470)Function

4-channel VoIP extension card. Compliant with Panasonic proprietary protocol, and ITU-T G.729A and G.711CODEC methods.

RJ45

LEDs

To LAN

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1, Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "2.2.9 Attaching a

Ferrite Core".

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector (100BASE-TX)

Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 8

TPO+TPO-

TPI+TPI-

TPO+ O Transmit data+

TPO- O Transmit data-

TPI+ I Receive data+

TPI- I Receive data-

– – Reserved

94 Installation Manual

2.4.5 IP-EXT4 Card (KX-TDA3470)

Page 95: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

ON LINE Green On-line status indication• ON: At least one port is in use (an IP-PT is connected)• OFF: No ports are in use (no IP-PTs are connected)

NoteIf the LINK indicator is OFF, the ON LINE indicator will also be OFF.

ALARM Red Alarm indication• ON: Alarm• OFF: Normal

LINK Green Link status indication• ON: Normal connection• OFF: Connection error

DATA Green Data transmission indication• ON: Data transmitting• OFF: No data transmitted

Installation Manual 95

2.4.5 IP-EXT4 Card (KX-TDA3470)

Page 96: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5 Information about the Other Cards

2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)Function

4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones, 4 door openers or external relays, and 4 external sensors.

To doorphones

To door openers/external relays

Telephone Line Cord

8-pin

10-pin

To external sensors

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, 8-pin terminal block ´ 1, 10-pin terminal block ´

1, Telephone Line Cord ´ 2, Terminal Box ´ 1 (for DPH4 card with RJ45 con-nectors) or 2 (for DPH4 card with RJ11 connectors)

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

NoticeThe connector type may be RJ45 or RJ11 depending on the country/area.Shown above is a card having the RJ45 connectors.

NoteFor details about connection to doorphones, door openers, external sensors, and external relays, referto "2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays".

96 Installation Manual

2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)

Page 97: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

Signal Name Function

1 8

DP2DP1

com1com2

9 16

DP4DP3

com3com4

DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit

DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit

com1 Doorphone 1 receive

com2 Doorphone 2 receive

DP4 Doorphone 4 transmit

DP3 Doorphone 3 transmit

com3 Doorphone 3 receive

com4 Doorphone 4 receive

– Reserved

RJ11 Connector

Signal Name Function

DP2DP1com1

com2

DP4DP3com3

com4

5 81 4

DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit

DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit

com1 Doorphone 1 receive

com2 Doorphone 2 receive

DP4 Doorphone 4 transmit

DP3 Doorphone 3 transmit

com3 Doorphone 3 receive

com4 Doorphone 4 receive

8-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

1 8

SENS 1aSENS 1b

SENS 2aSENS 2b

SENS 3aSENS 3b

SENS 4aSENS 4b

SENS 1a Sensor Input 1

SENS 1b com 1

SENS 2a Sensor Input 2

SENS 2b com 2

SENS 3a Sensor Input 3

SENS 3b com 3

SENS 4a Sensor Input 4

SENS 4b com 4

Installation Manual 97

2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)

Page 98: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

10-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

1 10

OP1b (RL1b)

OP1a (RL1a)

OP2b (RL2b)

OP2a (RL2a)

OP3b (RL3b)

OP3a (RL3a)

OP4b (RL4b)

OP4a (RL4a)

OP1b (RL1b) Door opener 1 (Relay 1)

OP1a (RL1a) Door opener 1 com (Relay 1 com)

OP2b (RL2b) Door opener 2 (Relay 2)

OP2a (RL2a) Door opener 2 com (Relay 2 com)

OP3b (RL3b) Door opener 3 (Relay 3)

OP3a (RL3a) Door opener 3 com (Relay 3 com)

OP4b (RL4b) Door opener 4 (Relay 4)

OP4a (RL4a) Door opener 4 com (Relay 4 com)

– Reserved

Connection Diagram for External Sensors and External RelaysPower to the external sensor is provided from the DPH4 card and must be grounded through the DPH4 cardas indicated in the diagram below. A pair of "sensor" and "common" lines must be connected to the DPH4 cardfor each external sensor. The PBX detects input from the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.

5 V

Sensor 4

Sensor 3

Sensor 2

Sensor 1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Relay 4

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

5 V 5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

5 V 5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

5 V 5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

sensor

common

sensor

common

sensor

common

sensor

common

98 Installation Manual

2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)

Page 99: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)Function

2-port doorphone card for 2 German-type doorphones, 2 door openers, 4 external sensors, and 4 externalrelays.

To doorphones/door openers

8-pin

10-pin

RJ45

Telephone Line CordTo external sensors

To external relays

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1, 8-pin terminal block ´ 1, 10-pin terminal block ´

1, Telephone Line Cord ´ 2, Terminal Box ´ 1

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

NoteFor details about connection to doorphones, door openers, external sensors, and external relays, referto "2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays".

Installation Manual 99

2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)

Page 100: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Pin AssignmentsRJ45 Connector

ProprietarySignal Name

StandardSignal Name Function

1 8 9 16

OP1bOP1a

Path_1bPath_1a

Call_1bCall_1a

DC1bDC1a

OP2bOP2a

Path_2bPath_2a

Call_2bCall_2a

DC2bDC2a

OP1b TO b (1) Door opener 1

OP1a TO a (1) Door opener 1 com

Path_1b b (1) Doorphone 1 transmit

Path_1a a (1) Doorphone 1 receive

Call_1b RT b (1) Doorphone 1 call button

Call_1a RT a (1) Doorphone 1 call button com

DC1b TS b (1) Doorphone control 1

DC1a TS a (1) Doorphone control 1 com

OP2b TO b (2) Door opener 2

OP2a TO a (2) Door opener 2 com

Path_2b b (2) Doorphone 2 transmit

Path_2a a (2) Doorphone 2 receive

Call_2b RT b (2) Doorphone 2 call button

Call_2a RT a (2) Doorphone 2 call button com

DC2b TS b (2) Doorphone control 2

DC2a TS a (2) Doorphone control 2 com

8-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

1 8

SENS 1aSENS 1b

SENS 2aSENS 2b

SENS 3aSENS 3b

SENS 4aSENS 4b

SENS 1a Sensor Input 1

SENS 1b com 1

SENS 2a Sensor Input 2

SENS 2b com 2

SENS 3a Sensor Input 3

SENS 3b com 3

SENS 4a Sensor Input 4

SENS 4b com 4

100 Installation Manual

2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)

Page 101: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

10-pin Terminal Block

Signal Name Function

1 10

RL1bRL1a

RL2bRL2a

RL3bRL3a

RL4bRL4a

RL1b Relay 1

RL1a Relay 1 com

RL2b Relay 2

RL2a Relay 2 com

RL3b Relay 3

RL3a Relay 3 com

RL4b Relay 4

RL4a Relay 4 com

– Reserved

Connection Diagram for External Sensors and External RelaysPower to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must be grounded through the DPH2 cardas indicated in the diagram below. A pair of "sensor" and "common" lines must be connected to the DPH2 cardfor each external sensor. The PBX detects input from the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.

5 V

Sensor 4

Sensor 3

Sensor 2

Sensor 1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Relay 4

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

5 V 5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

5 V 5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

5 V 5 V

10K Ω

2.2K

47K

33 Ω

33 Ω

sensor

common

sensor

common

sensor

common

sensor

common

Installation Manual 101

2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)

Page 102: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.3 ECHO8 Card (KX-TDA3166)Function

8-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences.

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Screw ´ 1User-supplied (not included): none

NoteTo establish a conference call involving 6 to 8 parties, install an ECHO8 card and enable echo cancellationfor conferences using the Maintenance Console. For details, refer to " Echo Cancel—Conference" in "4.17 [2-9] System Options" of the PC Programming Manual.

102 Installation Manual

2.5.3 ECHO8 Card (KX-TDA3166)

Page 103: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.4 MSG2 Card (KX-TDA3191)Function

2-channel message card.

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Screw ´ 1User-supplied (not included): none

Installation Manual 103

2.5.4 MSG2 Card (KX-TDA3191)

Page 104: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.5 SVM2 Card (KX-TDA3192)Function

2-channel simplified voice message card for Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature.

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Screw ´ 1User-supplied (not included): none

104 Installation Manual

2.5.5 SVM2 Card (KX-TDA3192)

Page 105: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.6 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA3194)Function

2-channel simplified voice message card for Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature. Also supports MSGcard features.

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Screw ´ 1User-supplied (not included): none

Installation Manual 105

2.5.6 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA3194)

Page 106: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.7 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA3168)Function

Sends Caller ID signals to extension ports.

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Screw ´ 1User-supplied (not included): none

106 Installation Manual

2.5.7 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA3168)

Page 107: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.8 MEC Card (KX-TDA3105)Function

Memory expansion card to increase system data storage space, double the number of DPTs (using DigitalXDP connection), and enable Broadcasting, display language selection for VM Menu, and Call Billing for GuestRoom features. To be installed in the MEC slot.

MEC Card

MEC Slot

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): noneUser-supplied (not included): none

CAUTIONMake sure to insert the MEC card between the guide rails until it locks into the MEC slot. Push the cardfirmly into place until you hear a clicking sound.

Removing the MEC CardPull open the guide rails using a flathead screwdriver and, while holding them open, remove the MEC card.

Installation Manual 107

2.5.8 MEC Card (KX-TDA3105)

Page 108: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.5.9 RMT Card (KX-TDA3196)Function

Analogue modem card for remote communication with the PBX. ITU-T V.90 support. To be installed in theRMT slot.

RMT Slot

RMT Card

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): noneUser-supplied (not included): none

CAUTIONMake sure to insert the RMT card between the guide rails until it locks into the RMT slot. Push the cardfirmly into place until you hear a clicking sound.

Removing the RMT CardPull open the guide rails using a flathead screwdriver and, while holding them open, remove the RMT card.

108 Installation Manual

2.5.9 RMT Card (KX-TDA3196)

Page 109: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.6 Connection of Extensions

2.6.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twis-ted Cable)

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 500 m

ø 0.5 mm: 720 m

ø 0.6 mm: 830 m

CAT 5: 720 m

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 500 m

ø 0.5 mm: 720 m

ø 0.6 mm: 830 m

CAT 5: 720 m

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 140 m

ø 0.5 mm: 229 m

ø 0.6 mm: 360 m

CAT 5: 229 m

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 698 m

ø 0.5 mm: 1128 m

ø 0.6 mm: 1798 m

CAT 5: 1128 m

Other PT and DSS Console

SLT

KX-T7600 Series DPT

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m

ø 0.5 mm: 347 m

ø 0.6 mm: 500 m

CAT 5: 347 m

PT-interface CS

KX-DT300 Series DPT

NoticeThe maximum cabling distance may vary depending on the conditions.

PT-interface CS DPT APT DSS Console SLT

Super Hybrid Ports(Main Board) ü ü ü ü ü

SLC4, SLC8 Cards ü

DLC4, DLC8 Cards ü ü ü

Installation Manual 109

2.6.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

Page 110: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

"ü" indicates that the extension card or Super Hybrid Ports support the terminal.

110 Installation Manual

2.6.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

Page 111: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.6.2 Parallel Connection of the ExtensionsAny SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.

NoteIn addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be connected in parallelwith an APT or a DPT.

With APTFor parallel connection, eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode must be disabled for that port through systemprogramming. Refer to "1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the FeatureGuide for further information.

To a Super Hybrid Port

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R", "D1",

and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

SLTAPT

Modular

T-Adaptor

With DPTParallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Referto "1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for furtherinformation.

Installation Manual 111

2.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Page 112: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To a Super Hybrid Port

SLTDPT

Modular

T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and

"D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

Using an EXtra Device PortWith KX-DT300 Series DPT (except KX-DT321)

TO MAIN UNIT/ PABX

TO TEL

To a Super Hybrid Port

DPT SLT

To a Super Hybrid Port

To SLT

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

112 Installation Manual

2.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Page 113: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665)

To a Super Hybrid Port

DPT

To a Super Hybrid Port

To SLT

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

SLT

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

With Other DPT (except KX-T7560 and KX-T7565)

To a Super Hybrid Port

DPT SLT

To a Super Hybrid Port To SLT

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

TO TEL

TO EMSS or TO MAIN UNIT

Installation Manual 113

2.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Page 114: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) ConnectionA DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT is connectedto a Super Hybrid Port, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP mode.

Note• Both DPTs must be KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DPTs (except KX-T7640). Note that the KX-T7667

can only be connected as a slave DPT.• Bluetooth Modules or USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection.• Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.• If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer

to "1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide forfurther information.

With KX-DT300 Series DPTUsing a Modular T-Adaptor

Slave DPTMaster DPT

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

Back View of DPTsTO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

Modular

T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and

"D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

114 Installation Manual

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 115: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using an EXtra Device Port

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

To SLT

Slave DPTMaster DPT

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

Back View of DPTsTO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

TO TEL

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 115

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 116: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7600E Series)Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

Modular

T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and

"D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

116 Installation Manual

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 117: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using an EXtra Device Port

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

To SLT

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

TO TEL

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 117

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 118: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

With KX-T7600E Series DPTUsing a Modular T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

Slave DPT

SLT

Master DPT

Modular

T-Adaptor

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

118 Installation Manual

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 119: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using an EXtra Device PortConnecting to a Slave DPT

SLTMaster DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

Slave DPTMaster DPT

To SLT

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

Back View of DPTs

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 119

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 120: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connecting to a Master DPT

SLT

To slave DPT

To SLT

Master DPT Slave DPT

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T", "R",

"D1" and "D2".

TO DIGITAL

TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX

TO TEL

Back View of DPTs

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 30 m

ø 0.5 mm: 50 m

ø 0.6 mm: 60 m

CAT 5: 50 m

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

To DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port

(for connection of SLT)

120 Installation Manual

2.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Page 121: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI ConnectionCTI connection between a PC and a KX-DT300 series/KX-T7633/KX-T7636 DPT provides first party callcontrol. The CTI connection is made via a USB interface (version 2.0), and uses the TAPI 2.1 protocol.A USB Module must be connected to the DPTs.

NoteThe operating system of the PC required for first party call control depends on your CTI applicationsoftware. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

USB Cable

To PC

ULL

USB Port

USB Module

NoteThe maximum length of the USB cable is 3 m.

Installation Manual 121

2.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

Page 122: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations

2.7.1 OverviewRequired Equipment and Maximum Number of Calls

CSs determine the area covered by the wireless system. The number of calls that can be made simultaneouslythrough each CS varies depending on the model, as follows:

CS Connection Port/Card Maximum Calls Compatible PSs

KX-TDA0158CE Super Hybrid Port/DLC card 8 • KX-TCA155• KX-TCA255• KX-TCA256• KX-TCA355• KX-TD7590• KX-TD7580

KX-TDA0141CE Super Hybrid Port/DLC card 2

NoticeThe CSs for DECT are for connection to specified Panasonic PBXs only.

NoteFor more details about the PS, refer to the Operating Instructions of the PS.

Required Distances between EquipmentCAUTION

• Maintain the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise, interference or thedisconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, faxmachine, etc., or microwaves

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

PBX and CS More than 2 m

Too many CSs in a small area can cause problems due to conflicts over which signal channels eachCS can use. Ideally, CSs should be a minimum of 25 m to 40 m apart.However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of theinstallation site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey todetermine the appropriate distance.

RF SpecificationItem Description

Radio Access Method MultiCarrier TDMA-TDD

122 Installation Manual

2.7.1 Overview

Page 123: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Item Description

Frequency Band 1880 MHz to 1900 MHz*1

Number of Carriers 10*2

Carrier Spacing 1728 kHz

Bit Rate 1152 kbps

Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame

Frame Length 10 ms

Modulation Scheme GFSK

Roll-off factor=0.5 50 % roll-off in the transmitter

Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding

Voice CODEC 32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)

Transmission Output Average 10 mWPeak 250 mW

*1 KX-TDA30BX/KX-TDA30TW: 1880 MHz to 1895 MHz*2 KX-TDA30BX/KX-TDA30TW: 8

CAUTION• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C), low temperature

(less than 0 °C), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).• The CS should not be placed near high-voltage equipment.• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.• Do not use this wireless system near another high-power cordless system such as DECT or SS

wireless.

Installation Manual 123

2.7.1 Overview

Page 124: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.2 Procedure OverviewWhen connecting the wireless system, use extreme care in conducting the site survey. Site surveys can beconducted using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590 PS. An incorrectly performed sitesurvey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "2.7.3 Site Planning".a. Obtain a map of the CS installation site.b. Identify the service area required by the user on the map.c. Plan the location of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials, etc.

2. Prepare for site surveyRefer to "2.7.4 Before Site Survey".a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor/battery box or by connecting them to a Super Hybrid

Port or a DLC card.d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Note• Install at least 2 m above the floor.• Keep the antennas in the upright position.

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "2.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590".a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.

Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 9

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

Using the KX-TD7590

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

CH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 9

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strengthweakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".

124 Installation Manual

2.7.2 Procedure Overview

Page 125: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least5 m.

e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service arearequired by the user.

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "2.7.6 After Site Survey".a. Turn off the PS.b. Stop supplying power, and return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the PBX and test the operationRefer to "2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".a. Connect the CSs to the PBX.b. Register the PSs to the PBX.c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or

conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "2.7.8 Wall Mounting".a. If there are no problems in testing, mount the CS on the wall.

Installation Manual 125

2.7.2 Procedure Overview

Page 126: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.3 Site PlanningChoosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best locationmay not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio WavesCharacteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of thebuilding.Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment maycreate noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.1. Radio waves are reflected by objects made of materials such as metal.2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.3. Radio waves penetrate objects made of materials such as glass.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than the number of

obstacles.• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from

various materials.

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the moreradio waves are reflected.

126 Installation Manual

2.7.3 Site Planning

Page 127: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire net Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.

Glass covered withheat-resistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetratewindows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the moreradio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, the moreradio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely penetratethem.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

Installation Manual 127

2.7.3 Site Planning

Page 128: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed in an area with no obstacles.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "2.7.5 Site Survey Using theKX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590").

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent

Coverage Area

Radio signal strength level is

greater than "3".

(About 50 m to 60 m)

Good Coverage Area

Radio signal strength

level is greater than "8".

(About 30 m to 40 m)

Good sound quality

can be maintained.

Out of Service:

Cannot make/receive calls

A

B

A

B

Radio Signal Strength Levels

C

Out of range

Receives noise easily or disconnects

May receive noise

Good

Better

Level: 00

Level: 01 to 02

Level: 03 to 07

Level: 08 to 10

Level: 11 to 12

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain a map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.d. Write down the above information on the map.

2. Examine the service area required by the user on the map, referring to the following example.a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area 30 m to 60 m in each direction,

depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that aCS cannot be installed outside a building.

b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverageareas of adjacent CSs.

128 Installation Manual

2.7.3 Site Planning

Page 129: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from oneCS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available forhandover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Interior WallsThings to take note of:• The room is separated by interior walls.• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.CS installation plan:• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as far as when there are no obstacles, because the radio

signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

70 m

150 m

CS no. 5

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4CS no. 3

Installation Manual 129

2.7.3 Site Planning

Page 130: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.4 Before Site SurveyUse the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590 PS to conduct the site survey.

NoteDisplay prompts for the site survey are only available in English.

Checking the CS ID NumberCheck the CS ID number label attached to the CS.

Assigning the CS ID Number to the PSUsing the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

A: + C: + E: +

B: + D: + F: +

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

3DEF

4GHI0

1 5JKL

2ABC

NoteTo clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

130 Installation Manual

2.7.4 Before Site Survey

Page 131: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TD7590

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

F1

F2

F3

INT'

OKA: C: E:

B: D: F:

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

NoteTo clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

Installation Manual 131

2.7.4 Before Site Survey

Page 132: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.2. Set the channel number switches as desired.3. Set the Power Supply Select switch as desired (KX-TDA0158CE only).

KX-TDA0158CE

6

5

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

DIP Switch

Radio Signal Test Switch

Power Supply Select Switch

Channel Number Switch

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9Channel 0

ON OFF

ON: From the Battery Box

OFF: From the PBX

132 Installation Manual

2.7.4 Before Site Survey

Page 133: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0141CE

Channel Number Switch

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

DIP Switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Radio Signal

Test Switch

Channel 0

1

2

3

4

Keep this switch at the default

"OFF" position. Otherwise, the

CS will not function.

NoteIf more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel number.

4. After setting the DIP switches, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box using a power supply adaptor.

WARNINGThe AC adaptor should be connected to a vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do notconnect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may causeit to become disconnected.

Notice• For users in the United Kingdom:

240 V AC must not be used on a building site. Instead of an AC adaptor, connect a battery box tothe CS.

• If the Power Supply Select switch is set to ON in step 3, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/batterybox. If it is set to OFF, connect the CS to a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC card (KX-TDA0158CEonly).

Installation Manual 133

2.7.4 Before Site Survey

Page 134: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE

Modular

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)

Modular

Telephone Cord(PSJA1017Z)

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)

Modular

Telephone Cord

5. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, keeping theantennas in the upright position.

134 Installation Manual

2.7.4 Before Site Survey

Page 135: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site survey. InRadio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength ofthe other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily asplanned during site planning, set the PS to Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coveragearea. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal StrengthAfter locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. Directly after entering RadioSignal Test mode, the PS scans channel 0 for a CS that it can connect to. The channel to be scanned can bechanged by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through 9.1. Enter Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

0 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.

To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:9005301234

0

Display example:

Using the KX-TD7590

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

CH0*1 SLOT:06

*2 SYNC

*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:90053012340 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 0

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.

To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

Note*1: Channel number*2: Slot number*3: When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.*4: Radio signal strength level*5: Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the number oferrors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame errors indicates greaterradio signal interference and more frequent noise during conversation. The ideal number of frameerrors is "0000".

CAUTIONStoring the scan data will clear all directory data.

Installation Manual 135

2.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

Page 136: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving towards and away from the CS.a. Move to the CS until the radio signal strength level becomes "12".b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level

is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level

is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

Channel no. 0

PS

PS

PS CH0

L:03

CH0

L:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

CH0

L:08

Out of range

Receives noise easily or disconnects

May receive noise

Good

Better

Level: 00

Level: 01 to 02

Level: 03 to 07

Level: 08 to 10

Level: 11 to 12

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

5 m to 10 mChannel no. 0 Channel no. 1

136 Installation Manual

2.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

Page 137: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 2 Channel no. 3

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service arearequired by the user.

Note• If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved each time.

If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurementof 10 channels ´ 24 slots in total can be made.

• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many frame errors), change the location of theCS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 99 1

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.

To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/A a

Installation Manual 137

2.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

Page 138: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TD7590

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 99 1

Previous or Next 0 to 9

Channel No.

To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/

Clearing the Stored Scan DataWhen "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is displayed after turning on the PS, you are required to clear the scan data.

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99 4GHI

Using the KX-TD7590

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 5 seconds.

1 99 4GHI

138 Installation Manual

2.7.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

Page 139: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.6 After Site SurveyAfter obtaining the proper measurement results, exit Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to thePBX.1. Hold down the POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.2. Disconnect the CS from the AC adaptor/battery box, Super Hybrid Port, or DLC card to stop supplying

electricity.

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE

6

5

4

3

2

1

ON OFF

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Installation Manual 139

2.7.6 After Site Survey

Page 140: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBXRefer to the following examples to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0158CE

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m

ø 0.5 mm: 347 m

ø 0.6 mm: 500 m

CAT 5: 347 m

Super Hybrid Port

Port No.

1

2

4

3

140 Installation Manual

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 141: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Super Hybrid Ports

or DLC4 card (RJ45)

1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

2

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

3

4

Super Hybrid Ports

or DLC4 card (RJ11)

1

1234

1234

D1

D2

D1

D2

D1

D2

1234

D1

D2

1234

2

3

4

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

Installation Manual 141

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 142: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1

12345678

D2

D1

3

6

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

2

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

3

4

12

45

78

5

:::

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 1 (RJ45)

DLC8 card (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 2 (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

Port No.

DLC8

5

6

8

7

1

2

4

3

142 Installation Manual

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 143: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 1 (RJ45)DLC8 card (RJ11)Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 2 (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

1234

1234

D1

D2

D1

D2

D1

D2

1234

D1

D2

1234

2

3

4

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

5

1234

D1

D2

:::

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• The no. 4 and no. 5 pins (Master) of the CS must be connected to a pair of pins on the Super Hybrid

Port or DLC4/DLC8 card. Then use 4 consecutive pairs of pins on the Super Hybrid Port or DLC4/DLC8 card, starting with the pins corresponding to the Master, as in the example above.

• When connecting multiple KX-TDA0158CE CSs to a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC4/DLC8 card, makesure that the no. 4 and no. 5 pins (Master) of adjacent CSs are at least 3 pairs of pins away on thecard.

• CS connections must be made within the same Super Hybrid Port or DLC4/DLC8 card.• When a wrong connection is made, satisfactory performance of the CS cannot be guaranteed. Check

the connection of CS and the PBX using the Maintenance Console. For information about how to viewCS information using the Maintenance Console, refer to "2.6.14 Utility—CS Information" in the PCProgramming Manual.

Installation Manual 143

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 144: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0141CE

Signal Name Signal NamePin No.

1

2

3

4

D1

D2

D1

D2

Pin No.

12

3

4

A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ11)CS (RJ11)

Signal Name

Signal NamePin No.

1

2

3

4

D1

D2

D2

Pin No.

12

3

4

D1

5

6

7

8

A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m

ø 0.5 mm: 347 m

ø 0.6 mm: 500 m

CAT 5: 347 m

Super Hybrid Port

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteFor details about the DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)" or "2.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172)".

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from a Super Hybrid Port or the DLC4/DLC8 card to the CS.

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE

144 Installation Manual

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 145: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

Installation Manual 145

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 146: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and PBX is required.A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required to perform the PBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" in the FeatureGuide, and "2.1 PT Programming" in the PT Programming Manual.

Entering the PBX System Programming Mode Using a PTAdministrator Level

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming

Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

Note means default value.

PS RegistrationOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different PBXs.

[690]001 to 028

PS No.1 to 4 digits

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.END

(HOLD)

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Register H/set".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

"Please wait".

"Enter Base PIN".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

C.Tone4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

System lock can be set after PS registration. When system lock is enabled, the system lock password will berequired for system setting.

146 Installation Manual

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 147: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TD7590

Select "DECT-SYS1-4"

Choose "ENABLE/DISABLE".

System Lock Password

System Lock Password

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

4 digits

4 digits

ENABLE

F

/

/

SELECT

SELECT

SELECT

/OK

/OK

To set system lock

F

DISABLE

OR

To register for the first time

To re-register

/

Select "INITIAL SETTING".

SELECT

/

Select "PS-PROGRAM".

SELECT

/

Select "DECT-SYS SETTING".

SELECT

4 digits

If required

/OK System Lock Password

Select "REGISTRATION".

/

4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

/OK

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7580

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Register H/set".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/ /C.Tone

4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the PBX. Before registeringthe PS to the PBX, enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to thePBX with the matching PIN.

Note• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the PBX and PS. Therefore, the PS can be

registered to the PBX without setting the PIN.• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the PBX. Therefore, during

normal operation after registration, even if there is more than 1 PBX with the same PIN near the PS,the PS will not be inadvertently linked to a different PBX.

Setting the PIN for PBX

[692]4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

ENTER ENTER1234

END(HOLD)

Installation Manual 147

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 148: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Changing the Display Language of the PSUsing the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Select Language".

Select "Display Option".

Select the desired language.

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

Using the KX-TD7590

/

Select "DISPLAY SETTING".

Select the desiredlanguage.

Select "LANGUAGE".

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

F

/

/SELECT

SELECTSELECT

0SELECT

Using the KX-TD7580

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Select Language".

Select "Display Option".

Select the desired language.

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/ /

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:• The PS is turned on.• The PS is within range.

[691]001 to 028

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".END

(HOLD)

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

148 Installation Manual

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 149: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

4 digits

Handset PIN

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Registration".

Select "Base 1–4".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

C.Tone

Select "YES".

Select "Cancel Base".

Using the KX-TD7590

Select thedesired item.

F

/

0 /

Select "DECT-SYS SETTING".

SELECT

4 digits

If required

/OK System Lock Password /

Select "CANCELDECT-SYS".

SELECT

SELECT

/

Select "YES".C.Tone

Press POWER for 5 seconds.

SELECT

Using the KX-TD7580

/Select "Setting Handset".

Select "Cancel Base".

Select "Registration".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

/

/

C.Tone

4 digits

Handset PIN

Select thedesired item.

/

Select "YES".

/

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent orconversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

Installation Manual 149

2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 150: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.7.8 Wall MountingMounting the KX-TDA0158CE

WARNING• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit

(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the unit.• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths

or metal plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0158CE) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Washer

Drive the screw to this point.

CAUTIONMake sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

150 Installation Manual

2.7.8 Wall Mounting

Page 151: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0158CE)Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

83 mm

NoteMake sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper outputstill deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

Installation Manual 151

2.7.8 Wall Mounting

Page 152: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Mounting the KX-TDA0141CEWARNING

• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.

• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the unit.• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths

or metal plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0141CE) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Washer

Drive the screw to this point.

CAUTIONMake sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

152 Installation Manual

2.7.8 Wall Mounting

Page 153: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0141CE)Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

NoteMake sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper outputstill deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

Installation Manual 153

2.7.8 Wall Mounting

Page 154: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations

2.8.1 OverviewRequired Equipment and Maximum Number of Calls

CSs determine the area covered by the wireless system. The number of calls that can be made simultaneouslythrough each CS varies depending on the model, as follows:

CS Connection Port/Card Maximum Calls Compatible PSs

KX-TDA0151 Super Hybrid Port/DLC card 2 • KX-TD7684• KX-TD7694• KX-TD7680• KX-TD7690

KX-TDA0141 Super Hybrid Port/DLC card 2

NoteFor more details about the PS, refer to the Operating Instructions of the PS.

Required Distances between EquipmentCAUTION

• Keeping some distance between the equipment listed below may prevent interference. (The distancemay vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, faxmachine, etc.

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

PBX and CS More than 2 m

CS and CS More than 15 m

• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C), low temperature(less than 0 °C), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).• The CS should not be placed near high-voltage equipment.• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.• Systems using 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere with the KX-TDA

wireless system. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN, Home RF,microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor noise.

NoticePlease take into consideration the distance between the CSs when site planning. Please consult a certifieddealer for details.However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installationsite and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine theappropriate distance.

154 Installation Manual

2.8.1 Overview

Page 155: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.2 Procedure OverviewWhen connecting the wireless system, use extreme care in conducting the site survey. An incorrectly performedsite survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "2.8.3 Site Planning".a. Obtain a map of the CS installation site.b. Identify the service area required by the user on the map.c. Plan the location of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials, etc.

2. Prepare the CS for site surveyRefer to "2.8.4 Before Site Survey".a. Assign a CS number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.b. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor/battery box or by connecting them to a Super Hybrid

Port or a DLC card.c. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Note• Install at least 2 m above the floor.• Keep the antennas in the upright position.

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "2.8.5 Site Survey".a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.

Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

0 << SEARCHING >>

CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:0123456789

1 9

Press 1, 9, and POWER for more than 2 seconds.

Display example:

1 to 9

CS No.

Using the KX-TD7680

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:01234567891 to 9

CS No.1 9 0

Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

SAVE:01234567891 to 9

CS No.1 99 0

Installation Manual 155

2.8.2 Procedure Overview

Page 156: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strengthweakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least

5 m.e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area

required by the user.

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "2.8.6 After Site Survey".a. Turn off the PS.b. Stop supplying power, and return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the PBX and test the operationRefer to "2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".a. Connect the CSs to the PBX.b. Register the PSs to the PBX.c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or

conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "2.8.8 Wall Mounting".a. If there are no problems in testing, mount the CS on the wall.

156 Installation Manual

2.8.2 Procedure Overview

Page 157: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.3 Site PlanningChoosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best locationmay not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio WavesCharacteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of thebuilding.Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment maycreate noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.1. Radio waves are reflected by objects made of materials such as metal.2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.3. Radio waves penetrate objects made of materials such as glass.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than the number of

obstacles.• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from

various materials.

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, themore radio waves are reflected.

Installation Manual 157

2.8.3 Site Planning

Page 158: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire net Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.

Glass covered withheat-resistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetratewindows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, themore radio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there is, themore radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely penetratethem.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

158 Installation Manual

2.8.3 Site Planning

Page 159: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed in an area with no obstacles.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "2.8.5 Site Survey").

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent

Coverage Area

Radio signal strength level is

greater than "3".

(About 50 m to 60 m)

Good Coverage Area

Radio signal strength

level is greater than "8".

(About 30 m to 40 m)

Good sound quality

can be maintained.

Out of Service:

Cannot make/receive calls

A

B

A

B

Radio Signal Strength Levels

C

Out of range

Receives noise easily or disconnects

May receive noise

Good

Better

Level: 00

Level: 01 to 02

Level: 03 to 07

Level: 08 to 10

Level: 11 to 12

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain a map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.d. Write down the above information on the map.

2. Examine the service area required by the user on the map, referring to the following example.a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area 30 m to 60 m in each direction,

depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that aCS cannot be installed outside a building.

b. If one CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverageareas of adjacent CSs.

Installation Manual 159

2.8.3 Site Planning

Page 160: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from oneCS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available forhandover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.If the signal from the CS fades, due to the structure of the building, there may be some handover delay.The user will hear a range warning before handover in this case. This also applies in the case ofinterference from 2.4 GHz apparatus.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Interior WallsThings to take note of:• The room is separated by interior walls.• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.CS installation plan:• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as far as when there are no obstacles, because the radio

signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

70 m

150 m

CS no. 5

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4CS no. 3

160 Installation Manual

2.8.3 Site Planning

Page 161: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.4 Before Site SurveySetting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey

1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.2. Set the CS number switches as desired.3. Set the Power Supply Select switch as desired (KX-TDA0151 only).

KX-TDA0151

1 2 3 4 5 6

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 3

CS no. 4

CS no. 5

CS no. 6

CS no. 7

CS no. 8

CS no. 9

DIP Switch

Radio Signal Test Switch

Power Supply Select Switch

CS Number Switch

ON: From the AC Adaptor or

Battery Box

OFF: From the PBX

OFF

ON

Installation Manual 161

2.8.4 Before Site Survey

Page 162: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0141

CS Number Switch

CS no. 1 CS no. 2 CS no. 3 CS no. 4 CS no. 5 CS no. 6 CS no. 7 CS no. 8 CS no. 9

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

DIP Switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

Radio Signal

Test Switch

Keep this switch at the default

"OFF" position. Otherwise, the

CS will not function.

NoteIf more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique CS number.

4. After setting the DIP switches, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box using a power supply adaptor.

WARNINGThe AC adaptor should be connected to a vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do notconnect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may causeit to become disconnected.

NoticeIf the Power Supply Select switch is set to ON in step 3, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box.If it is set to OFF, connect the CS to a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC card (KX-TDA0151 only).

162 Installation Manual

2.8.4 Before Site Survey

Page 163: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0151 KX-TDA0141

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)

Modular

Telephone Cord

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)

Modular

Telephone Cord

5. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, keeping theantennas in the upright position.

Installation Manual 163

2.8.4 Before Site Survey

Page 164: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.5 Site SurveyThe PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS. After installing theCSs temporarily, set the PS to Radio Signal Test mode and measure each CS coverage area. Then, recordthe results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal StrengthNote

Display prompts for the site survey are only available in English.1. Enter Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 99 0

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds. 1 to 9

CS No.

Scan Data No.0 to 9

Display example:

To store the scan data

Using the KX-TD7680

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 to 9

CS No.1 99

0 to 9

Scan Data No.

To store the scan data

0

Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

<< SEARCHING >>CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

*1

SAVE:0123456789*2

1 to 9

CS No.1 99

0 to 9

Scan Data No.

To store the scan data

0

Note*1: CS number and radio signal strength level.*2: Scan data (test result) number. Empty memory space will be indicated by a number; stored memoryspace will be indicated by a "-".

164 Installation Manual

2.8.5 Site Survey

Page 165: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving towards and away from the CS.a. Move to the CS until the radio signal strength level becomes "12".b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level

is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level

is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

CS no. 1

PS

PS

PS CS NO.1 LEVEL:3

CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

CS NO.1 LEVEL:8

Out of range

Receives noise easily or disconnects

May receive noise

Good

Better

Level: 00

Level: 01 to 02

Level: 03 to 07

Level: 08 to 10

Level: 11 to 12

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

5 m to 10 mCS no. 1 CS no. 2

Installation Manual 165

2.8.5 Site Survey

Page 166: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

CS no. 1 CS no. 2

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service arearequired by the user.

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

1 99 1NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Scan Data No.

Display example:

When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

Using the KX-TD7680

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Scan Data No.1 99 1

Display example:

When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

To the Desired Scan Data No.

166 Installation Manual

2.8.5 Site Survey

Page 167: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TD7690

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Scan Data No.1 99 1

Display example:

When there is scan data

When there is no scan data

NO.1CS No.2 LEVEL: 9

NO.0NOT SAVED

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Deleting the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

1 99 22

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Scan Data No.

Using the KX-TD7680

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Scan Data No.1 99

To the Desired Scan Data No.

2

Using the KX-TD7690

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9, or # for all data

Scan Data No.1 99

To the Desired Scan Data No.

2

Installation Manual 167

2.8.5 Site Survey

Page 168: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.6 After Site SurveyAfter obtaining the proper measurement results, exit Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to thePBX.1. Hold down the POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.2. Disconnect the CS from the AC adaptor/battery box, Super Hybrid Port, or DLC card to stop supplying

electricity.

KX-TDA0151 KX-TDA0141

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

KX-TDA0151 KX-TDA0141

1 2 3 4 5 6

OFF

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

168 Installation Manual

2.8.6 After Site Survey

Page 169: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBXRefer to the following example to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0141

Signal Name Signal NamePin No.

1

2

3

4

D1

D2

D1

D2

Pin No.

12

3

4

A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ11)CS (RJ11)

Signal Name

Signal NamePin No.

1

2

3

4

D1

D2

D2

Pin No.

12

3

4

D1

5

6

7

8

A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m

ø 0.5 mm: 347 m

ø 0.6 mm: 500 m

CAT 5: 347 m

Super Hybrid Port

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

NoteFor details about the DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)" or "2.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172)".

Installation Manual 169

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 170: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from a Super Hybrid Port or the DLC4/DLC8 card to the CS.

KX-TDA0151 KX-TDA0141

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

Modular

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

KX-TDA0151 KX-TDA0141

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

To a Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card

170 Installation Manual

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 171: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and PBX is required.A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required to perform the PBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" in the FeatureGuide, and "2.1 PT Programming" in the PT Programming Manual.

Entering the System Programming ModePT (Administrator Level)

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming

Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

PS (Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694)

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "System Option".

If required

4 digits

System Lock Password System Setting Menu

PS (Using the KX-TD7680)

System Setting Menu

Select "SYSTEM SET".

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

Select"PS PROGRAM".

4 digits

System Lock Password

If required

FUNCFUNC

PS (Using the KX-TD7690)

System Setting Menu

Select "SYSTEM SETTING".

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

S1 S1

MENU SEL

S1

SEL

Select"PS PROGRAM".

4 digits

System Lock Password

If requiredENTR

S1

Note means default value throughout this section.

Installation Manual 171

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 172: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

PS Registration

[690]001 to 028

PS No.1 to 4 digits

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.END

(HOLD)

When the PS has not been registered yetWhen registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for the display. (You donot need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering for the first time.)Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

Select the desired language.

Press "F" for 2 seconds.

C.Tone C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7680

PressPOWER for2 seconds.

Press S3 for 2 seconds.

C.TonePress S2 repeatedly to select the desired language.

[ F2 ] [ F3 ]

Using the KX-TD7690

PressPOWER for2 seconds.

Press S3 for 2 seconds.

C.TonePress S2 repeatedlyto select the desiredlanguage.

F2 F3

When the PS has already been registered to another PBXOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different PBXs.Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Choose "Base 1–4".

Select "Register H/S"

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7680

Choose "SYSTEM 1–4".

Select "REGISTRATION".

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7690

Choose "SYSTEM 1–4".

Select "REGISTRATION".

S1S1

SEL SEL

C.Tone

Setting the System LockWhen a system lock has been set, the system lock password will be required for PS system setting.

172 Installation Manual

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 173: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Select "System Lock".

4 digits 4 digits

Choose "On/Off".

On

Off

C.Tone

System Lock Password System Lock Password

Using the KX-TD7680

Choose "Enable/Disable".Select

"SYSTEM LOCK".

C.Tone

4 digits 4 digitsENABLE

DISABLE

System Lock Password System Lock Password

Using the KX-TD7690

S1Choose "Enable/Disable".

SEL

ENTR

S1

S1

S1

S1

CHNG

SEL

ENTR

Select "SYSTEM LOCK".

C.Tone

4 digits 4 digitsENABLE

DISABLE

System Lock Password System Lock Password

Installation Manual 173

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 174: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the PBX. Before registeringthe PS to the PBX, enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to thePBX with the matching PIN.

Note• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the PBX and PS. Therefore, the PS can be

registered to the PBX without setting the PIN.• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the PBX. Therefore, during

normal operation after registration, even if there is more than 1 PBX with the same PIN near the PS,the PS will not be inadvertently linked to a different PBX.

Setting the PIN for PBX

[692]4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

ENTER ENTER1234

END(HOLD)

Setting the PIN for PSUsing the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Select "Change PIN"

1 to 8 digits1234

C.TonePIN for PS Registration

Using the KX-TD7680

Select "CHANGE PIN"

C.Tone1 to 4 digits

1234

PIN for PS Registration

Using the KX-TD7690

Select "CHANGE PIN" S1

ENTR

S1

SEL

C.Tone1 to 4 digits

1234

PIN for PS Registration

174 Installation Manual

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 175: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:• The PS is turned on.• The PS is within range.

[691]001 to 028

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".END

(HOLD)

If the registration information is still stored in the PSUsing the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Select "Base 1-4".

Select "Yes".

C.Tone

Select "Cancel Base".

Using the KX-TD7680

Select the desired item.

Select "DELETESYSTEM".

Select "YES".

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7690

Select the desired item.

Select "DELETESYSTEM".

S1S1

SEL SEL

Select "YES".

C.ToneS1

SEL

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent orconversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

Installation Manual 175

2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 176: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.8.8 Wall MountingMounting the KX-TDA0151

WARNING• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit

(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers, wall mounting plate) included with

the unit.• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths

or metal plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0151) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Insert the upper and lower tabs of the wall mounting plate into the designated openings in the base unit.

KX-TDA0151

Tabs

176 Installation Manual

2.8.8 Wall Mounting

Page 177: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4. Slide the wall mounting plate in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.

KX-TDA0151

5. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

KX-TDA0151

Washer

Drive the screw to this point.

CAUTIONMake sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

Installation Manual 177

2.8.8 Wall Mounting

Page 178: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0151)Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

83 mm

NoteMake sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper outputstill deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

178 Installation Manual

2.8.8 Wall Mounting

Page 179: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Mounting the KX-TDA0141WARNING

• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.

• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the unit.• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths

or metal plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0141) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Washer

Drive the screw to this point.

CAUTIONMake sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

Installation Manual 179

2.8.8 Wall Mounting

Page 180: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0141)Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

NoteMake sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper outputstill deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

180 Installation Manual

2.8.8 Wall Mounting

Page 181: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9 Connection of DECT 6.0 Portable Stations

2.9.1 OverviewNames and Locations of CS

LED

Antennas

CS ID Number

(ID: xxxxxxxxxx)

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

STATUS Green/Red CS status indication• OFF: Power Off• Green ON: Stand-by (no active calls)• Slow Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Talk (active calls)• Moderate Green Flashing (120 times per minute): Busy• Red ON: Fault (includes Initialisation)• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service/Starting up

CS status indication during the site survey• Red ON: The CS is connected to an AC adaptor/battery box.• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): The CS is connected to the

PBX.

Required Equipment and Maximum Number of CallsCSs determine the area covered by the wireless system. The number of calls that can be made simultaneouslythrough each CS varies depending on the model, as follows:

CS Connection Port/Card Maximum Calls Compatible PSs

KX-TDA0155 Super Hybrid Port/DLC card 2 • KX-TD7685• KX-TD7695KX-TDA0158 Super Hybrid Port/DLC card 8

NoteFor more details about the PS, refer to the Operating Instructions of the PS.

Installation Manual 181

2.9.1 Overview

Page 182: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Required Distances between EquipmentMaintain the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise, interference or thedisconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, faxmachine, etc.

More than 2 m

CS and PS More than 1 m

Each CS More than 3 m

Each PS More than 0.5 m

PBX and CS More than 2 m

If multiple CSs cover the same area, the phone connection may become noisy or the number of possiblesimultaneous calls with PSs may decrease due to interference between the CSs. For details, refer to "2.9.5 SiteSurvey—Testing the Radio Signal Strength".The required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation site andconditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct a site survey to determine the appropriate distance.

RF SpecificationItem Description

Radio Access Method MultiCarrier TDMA-TDD

Frequency Band 1920 MHz to 1930 MHz

Number of Carriers 5

Carrier Spacing 1728 kHz

Bit Rate 1152 kbps

Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame

Frame Length 10 ms

Modulation Scheme GFSK

Roll-off factor=0.5 50 % roll-off in the transmitter

Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding

Voice CODEC 32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.726)

Transmission Output Peak 0.12 W

CAUTION• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C), low temperature

(less than 0 °C), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).• The CS should not be placed near high-voltage equipment.• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.

182 Installation Manual

2.9.1 Overview

Page 183: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.2 Procedure OverviewWhen connecting the wireless system, use extreme care in conducting the site survey. An incorrectly performedsite survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

Notice• When installing the DECT 6.0 wireless system in an area where another wireless system (2.4 GHz) is

already installed, it is necessary to reconduct the site survey to find the optimum position for the CS.If you install the new CS in the same position as the old CS, it may result in a poor service area, frequentnoise, and disconnection of calls.

• In this case, it is necessary to perform system initialisation. For details about the system initialisationprocedure, refer to "2.13.1 Starting the PBX".

1. Investigate the installation siteRefer to "2.9.3 Site Planning".a. Obtain a map of the CS installation site.b. Identify the service area required by the user on the map.c. Plan the location of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials, etc.

2. Prepare for site surveyRefer to "2.9.4 Before Site Survey".a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor/battery box or by connecting them to the PBX.d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.

Note• Install at least 2 m above the floor.• Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna

diversity).

3. Conduct the site surveyRefer to "2.9.5 Site Survey".a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.

Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Display example:

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0 SLOT:06 SYNCL:12 0000/0100CS-ID:9005301234

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99 0

0 to 4

Channel No.

To surveyspecific channel

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strengthweakens as you walk away from the CS.

c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas meet where the radio signal strength level is "7" to "9".e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area

required by the user.

Installation Manual 183

2.9.2 Procedure Overview

Page 184: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4. Finish the site surveyRefer to "2.9.6 After Site Survey".a. Turn off the PS.b. Stop supplying power, and return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the PBX and test the operationRefer to "2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".a. Connect the CSs to the PBX.b. Register the PSs to the PBX.c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or

conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wallRefer to "2.9.8 Wall Mounting".a. If there are no problems in testing, mount the CS on the wall.

184 Installation Manual

2.9.2 Procedure Overview

Page 185: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.3 Site PlanningChoosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best locationmay not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio WavesCharacteristics of Radio WavesThe transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of thebuilding.Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment maycreate noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.1. Radio waves are reflected by objects made of materials such as metal.2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.3. Radio waves penetrate objects made of materials such as glass.

CS

Column

3. Penetration

2. Diffraction

1. Reflection

Relationships between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than the number of

obstacles.• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from

various materials.

Installation Manual 185

2.9.3 Site Planning

Page 186: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves pene-trate them.

Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more ironthere is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire net Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to bereflected.

Glass covered with heatre-sistant film

Radio waves are weakened considerably whenthey penetrate windows.

Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more ironthere is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetratethem.

Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more ironthere is, the more radio waves tend to be reflectedor diffracted.

Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.

Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, andrarely penetrate them.

Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they areweakened.

186 Installation Manual

2.9.3 Site Planning

Page 187: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

CS Coverage AreaThe example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed in an area with no obstacles.

NoteRadio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "2.9.5 Site Survey").

A

B

A

B

C

Gray Zone:Conversation will be

intermittent Out of Service:

Cannot make/receive calls

Good Coverage Area

Radio signal strength

level is greater than "8".

(About 20 m to 30 m)

Good sound quality

can be maintained.

Coverage Area

Radio signal strength level is

greater than "3".

(About 35 m to 50 m)

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Better

Good

May receive noise

Receives noise easily or disconnects

Out of range

Level: 11 to 12

Level: 08 to 10

Level: 03 to 07

Level: 01 to 02

Level: 00

Site Survey Preparation1. Obtain a map and investigate the installation site.

a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.d. Write down the above information on the map.

2. Examine the service area required by the user on the map, referring to the following example.a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area 20 m to 50 m in each direction,

depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that aCS cannot be installed outside a building.

b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverageareas of adjacent CSs.

Installation Manual 187

2.9.3 Site Planning

Page 188: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from oneCS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available forhandover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Interior WallsThings to take note of:• The room is separated by interior walls.• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.CS installation plan:• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as far as when there are no obstacles, because the radio

signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

100 m

50 m

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 4

CS no. 5

CS no. 3

188 Installation Manual

2.9.3 Site Planning

Page 189: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.4 Before Site SurveyUse the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695 PS to conduct the site survey.

NoteDisplay prompts for the site survey are only available in English.

Checking the CS ID NumberCheck the CS ID number label attached to the CS. If the CS ID number label is not attached to the CS, checkthe CS ID number using the Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "2.6.14 Utility—CS Information" in thePC Programming Manual.

Assigning the CS ID Number to the PSUsing the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F

CS No. CS ID No.1 99 2ABC

To enter letters

A: + C: + E: +

B: + D: + F: +

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

3DEF

4GHI0

1 5JKL

2ABC

NoteTo clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 7

CS No.

1 99 3DEF

To the Desired CS No.

OR

#

To clear one by one

To clear all at onceTo the initial display

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.2. Set the channel number switches as desired.3. Set the Power Supply Select switch as desired.

Installation Manual 189

2.9.4 Before Site Survey

Page 190: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0155

1 2 3 4 5 6

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

4321

Channel 1

Channel 0

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

DIP Switch

Radio Signal Test Switch

Power Supply Select Switch

Channel Number Switch

OFF

ON

ON: From the AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-

TCA1)/Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

OFF: From the PBX

190 Installation Manual

2.9.4 Before Site Survey

Page 191: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0158

6

5

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

2

1

DIP Switch

Radio Signal Test Switch

Power Supply Select Switch

Channel Number Switch

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4Channel 0

ON OFF

ON: From the AC Adaptor (KX-A11)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

OFF: From the PBX

NoteIf more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel number.

4. After setting the DIP switches, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box using a power supply adaptor,or connect it to the PBX.

WARNINGThe AC adaptor should be connected to a vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do notconnect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may causeit to become disconnected.

Notice• When using the KX-TDA0158, it is NOT recommended to conduct the site survey using the battery

box.• If the Power Supply Select switch is set to ON in step 3, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery

box. If it is set to OFF, connect the CS to the PBX.

Installation Manual 191

2.9.4 Before Site Survey

Page 192: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

KX-TDA0155

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)

RJ11 Modular

RJ11 Modular

Telephone Cord

To PBX

RJ11 Modular

KX-TDA0158

RJ45 Modular

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

To PBX

Power Supply Adaptor(PSZZ1TDA0142)

RJ45 Modular

Telephone Cord(PSJA1017Z)

RJ11 Modular

192 Installation Manual

2.9.4 Before Site Survey

Page 193: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, and place theantennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity), as follows:

At least 2 m

45º

45º

90º

Installation Manual 193

2.9.4 Before Site Survey

Page 194: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.5 Site SurveyThe PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site survey. InRadio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength ofthe other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily asplanned during site planning, set the PS to Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coveragearea. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal StrengthAfter locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. Directly after entering RadioSignal Test mode, the PS scans channel 0 for a CS that it can connect to. The channel to be scanned can bechanged by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through 4.

1. Enter Radio Signal Test mode.Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

0 to 9

Log No.

To store the scan data

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99

Previous or Next 0 to 4

Channel No.

To survey other slots To survey specific channel

/

RADIO STRENGTH<<< MEASURING >>>

RADIO STRENGTHCH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3

L:12*4 0000/0100*5

CS-ID:9005301234

0

Display example:

*1 : Channel number

*2 : Slot number

*3 : When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.

*4 : Radio signal strength level (12 to 00)

*5 : Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the number oferrors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame errors indicates greaterradio signal interference and more frequent noise during conversation. The ideal number of frameerrors is "0000".

*6 : Error rate (%) = Frame error (0000 to 9999) / Frame counter (0000 to 9999) ´ 100

Note• Storing the scan data will clear all directory data.• The PS will not operate in normal mode if scan data is saved on it. For details on clearing scan

data, refer to "Clearing the Stored Scan Data".2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving towards and away from the CS.

a. Move to the CS until the radio signal strength level becomes "12".b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level

is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.

194 Installation Manual

2.9.5 Site Survey

Page 195: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength levelis greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

PS

PS

PS

Channel no. 0

CH0

L:03

CH0

L:12

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Better

Good

May receive noise

Receives noise easily or disconnects

Out of range

Level: 11 to 12

Level: 08 to 10

Level: 03 to 07

Level: 01 to 02

Level: 00

CH0

L:08

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.a. Plan adjacent CS coverage areas so that areas meet where radio signal strength level is "7" to "9".

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Installation Manual 195

2.9.5 Site Survey

Page 196: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

b. Plan the CS coverage areas to meet for at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 2 Channel no. 3

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service arearequired by the user.

Note• If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved each time.

If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurementof 5 channels ´ 24 slots in total can be made.

• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many frame errors), change the location of theCS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

• If multiple CSs cover the same area, the phone connection may become noisy or the number ofpossible simultaneous calls with PSs may decrease due to interference between the CSs. As aguideline, the maximum number of CSs in an area with a radio signal strength of "11" is 4 (forKX-TDA0155)/2 (for KX-TDA0158).

Level 11

KX-TDA0155

To guarantee the number of simultaneous calls, the KX-TDA0158 is recommended.

196 Installation Manual

2.9.5 Site Survey

Page 197: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Referring to the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

0 to 9

Log No.1 99 1

Previous or Next 0 to 4

Channel No.

To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/A a

Clearing the Stored Scan DataUsing the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press 1, 9, and POWERfor more than 2 seconds.

1 99 4GHI

Installation Manual 197

2.9.5 Site Survey

Page 198: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.6 After Site SurveyAfter obtaining the proper measurement results, exit Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to thePBX.1. Hold down the POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.2. Disconnect the CS from the AC adaptor/battery box or the PBX to stop supplying electricity.

KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

KX-TDA0155

1 2 3 4 5 6

OFF

ON

KX-TDA0158

6

5

4

3

2

1

ON OFF

198 Installation Manual

2.9.6 After Site Survey

Page 199: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBXNote

When connecting both KX-TDA0155 and KX-TDA0158 CSs to the same card, the KX-TDA0158 CSs mustbe connected to lower-numbered pins on the card than the KX-TDA0155 CSs.

Refer to the following examples to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0155

Signal Name Signal NamePin No.

1

2

3

4

D1

D2

D1

D2

Pin No.

12

3

4

A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ11)CS (RJ11)

Signal Name

Signal NamePin No.

1

2

3

4

D1

D2

D2

Pin No.

12

3

4

D1

5

6

7

8

A Super Hybrid Port,

or DLC4/DLC8 card (RJ45)

CS (RJ11)

Maximum Distance

222 m

347 m

500 m

Cable

ø 0.4 mm:

ø 0.5 mm:

ø 0.6 mm:

Super Hybrid Port

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Installation Manual 199

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 200: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

NoteFor details about the DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)" or "2.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172)".

KX-TDA0158

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m

ø 0.5 mm: 347 m

ø 0.6 mm: 500 m

CAT 5: 347 m

Port No.

1

2

4

3

Super Hybrid Port

200 Installation Manual

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 201: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Super Hybrid Ports

or DLC4 card (RJ45)

1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

2

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

3

4

Super Hybrid Ports

or DLC4 card (RJ11)

1

1234

1234

D1

D2

D1

D2

D1

D2

1234

D1

D2

1234

2

3

4

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

Installation Manual 201

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 202: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1

12345678

D2

D1

3

6

D2

D1

3

6

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

12345678

D2

D1

2

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

3

4

12

45

78

5

12

45

78

6

:::

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 1 (RJ45)

DLC8 card (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 2 (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

Port No.DLC8

5

6

8

7

1

2

4

3

202 Installation Manual

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 203: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 1 (RJ45)DLC8 card (RJ11)Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D1C

D2C

D1B

D2A

D2B

D1D

D2D

D1A

CS 2 (RJ45)

Pin No.Signal Name

Master

1

1234

1234

D1

D2

D1

D2

D1

D2

1234

D1

D2

1234

2

3

4

Signal Name Pin No.Port No.

5

1234

D1

D2

6

1234

D1

D2

:::

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CSAccessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note• The no. 3, 4, 5 and 6 pins (Master) of the CS must be connected to 2 pairs of pins on the Super Hybrid

Port or DLC4/DLC8 card. Then use 4 consecutive pairs of pins on the Super Hybrid Port or DLC4/DLC8 card, starting with the pins corresponding to the Master, as in the example above.

• When connecting multiple KX-TDA0158 CSs to a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC4/DLC8 card, make surethat the no. 3, 4, 5 and 6 pins (Master) of adjacent CSs are at least 2 pairs of pins away on the card.

• For details about the DLC4 card or DLC8 card, refer to "2.4.1 DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171)" or "2.4.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172)".

• CS connections must be made within the same Super Hybrid Port or DLC4/DLC8 card.• When a wrong connection is made, satisfactory performance of the CS cannot be guaranteed. Check

the connection of CS and the PBX using the Maintenance Console. For information about how to viewCS information using the Maintenance Console, refer to "2.6.14 Utility—CS Information" in the PCProgramming Manual.

Installation Manual 203

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 204: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connecting the CS1. Connect the cable from the PBX to the CS.

KX-TDA0155

RJ11 Modular

To PBX

KX-TDA0158

RJ45 Modular

To PBX

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).

KX-TDA0155

To PBX

KX-TDA0158

To PBX

Registering the PSThe PS must be registered to the PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and PBX is required.A Proprietary Telephone (PT) with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required to perform thePBX system programming.

NoteFor details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide,and "2.1 PT Programming" in the PT Programming Manual.

204 Installation Manual

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 205: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Entering the System Programming Mode

PT (Administrator Level)

#

= 1234

System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming

Programming No.

3 digits

PROGRAM/PAUSE

Notemeans default value throughout this section.

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS RegistrationTo prevent registering the PS to a wrong PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the PBX. Before registeringthe PS to the PBX, enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to thePBX with the matching PIN.

Note• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the PBX and PS. Therefore, the PS can be

registered to the PBX without setting the PIN.• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the PBX. Therefore, during

normal operation after registration, even if there is more than 1 PBX with the same PIN near the PS,the PS will not be inadvertently linked to a different PBX.

Setting the PIN for PBX

[692]4 digits

PIN for PS Registration

ENTER ENTER1234

END(HOLD)

Setting the PIN for PS

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Select "Change PIN".

1 to 8 digits1234

C.TonePIN for PS Registration

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "System Option".

If required

4 digits

System Lock Password

PS Registration

[690]001 to 028

PS No.1 to 4 digits

ENTER ENTER

To the PSoperationbelow

Extn. No.END

(HOLD)

Installation Manual 205

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 206: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

When the PS has not been registered yetWhen registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for the display. (You donot need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering for the first time.)

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press POWER for 2 seconds.

Select the desired language.

Press "F" for 2 seconds.

C.Tone C.Tone

If required

When the PS has already been registered to another PBXOne PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different PBXs.

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Select the desiredbase (Base 1–4).

Select "Register H/S".

C.Tone

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "System Option".

If required

4 digits

System Lock Password

PS TerminationConfirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:• The PS is turned on.• The PS is within range.

[691]001 to 028

PS No.

ENTER ENTER

END(HOLD)

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

Press "YES".Press "CLEAR".

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayedThe registration information is still stored in the PS. You need to delete the registration information from thePS.

206 Installation Manual

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 207: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Select the desiredbase (Base 1–4).

Select "Yes".

C.Tone

Select "Cancel Base".

Press POWERfor 2 seconds.

Select "Setting Handset".

Select "System Option".

If required

4 digits

System Lock Password

Testing the OperationWalk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent orconversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

Installation Manual 207

2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Page 208: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.9.8 Wall MountingMounting the KX-TDA0155/KX-TDA0158

WARNING• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit

(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers, wall mounting plate) included with

the unit.• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths

or metal plates in the wall.• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.

Note• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.

3. Insert the upper and lower tabs of the wall mounting plate into the designated openings in the base unit.

KX-TDA0155

Tabs

Wall Mounting Plate

(PSKL1032Y4)

KX-TDA0158

Tabs

Wall Mounting Plate

(PSKL1032Y4)

4. Slide the wall mounting plate in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.

KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

208 Installation Manual

2.9.8 Wall Mounting

Page 209: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

KX-TDA0155

Washer

Drive the screw to this point.

KX-TDA0158

Drive the screw to this point.

Washer

6. Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity),as follows:

45º

45º

90º

CAUTIONMake sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

Installation Manual 209

2.9.8 Wall Mounting

Page 210: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Reference for Wall MountingPlease copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

Install a screw here.

83 mm

100 mm

NoteMake sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper outputstill deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

210 Installation Manual

2.9.8 Wall Mounting

Page 211: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.10 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, Ex-ternal Sensors, and External Relays

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sen-sors, and External Relays

A maximum of 4 doorphones (KX-T30865/KX-T7765), 4 door openers or external relays, and 4 externalsensors can be connected to the PBX with a DPH4 card. A maximum of 2 doorphones (German-type), 2 dooropeners, 4 external sensors, and 4 external relays can be connected to the PBX with a DPH2 card.

NoteDoorphones, door openers, external sensors, and external relays are user-supplied.

Maximum Cabling Distance

Doorphone

Door Opener

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 70 m

ø 0.5 mm: 113 m

ø 0.6 mm: 180 m

CAT 5: 113 m

External Sensor/

External Relay Device

Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865/KX-T7765)Note

The illustrations shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-T30865.1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.

Panasonic

Screw

Installation Manual 211

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 212: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Note for KX-T7765 UsersWhen loosening/tightening the screw, do not scratch the cabinet wall with the driver shaft.

Cabinet Wall

2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.

Screw

To 8-pin terminal block

NoteTwo kinds of screws are included with the doorphone. Please choose the appropriate kind for your walltype.

: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall

: when you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall

3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the back cover.

To 8-pin terminal block

4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.

212 Installation Manual

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 213: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connection of Doorphones to the DPH4 Card with RJ45 Connectors1. Unlatch the cover of the terminal box by inserting a flathead screwdriver into the openings and levering the

cover open. Follow the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4.

2. Connect the wires of doorphones to the terminal box.For details about pin assignments for the DPH4 card, refer to "2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)".

Terminal Box

(included with the card)

DP2

Reserved

com2

ReservedReserved

Reserved

DP1

com1 DP4Reserved

Reserved

com4

Reserved

Reserved

DP3

com3

To doorphones

Pin Assignments for Terminal Box

Installation Manual 213

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 214: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3. Cut and remove the appropriate parts from the cover depending on your preference.

4. Make sure to run the connected wires through the opening. Then, close the cover.

214 Installation Manual

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 215: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5. Connect the terminal box to the DPH4 card in the PBX using the telephone line cords included with thecard.

Telephone Line Cord

To DPH4 card

To doorphones

Connection of Doorphones to the DPH4 Card with RJ11 Connectors1. Connect the DPH4 card to the terminal boxes using the telephone line cords included with the card. Refer

to "2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)" for pin assignments.2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.

Installation Manual 215

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 216: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal box.

PanasonicPanasonic PanasonicPanasonic

Yellow

Red

Black

Telephone Line Cord

Telephone Line Cord

Green

Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2

To DPH4 card

Terminal Box

(included with the card)

PanasonicPanasonic PanasonicPanasonic

Yellow

Red

Black

Green

Connection of Door Openers and German Type Doorphones to DPH2 Card1. Unlatch the cover of the terminal box by inserting a flathead screwdriver into the openings and levering the

cover open. Follow the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4.

216 Installation Manual

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 217: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Connect the wires of door openers and doorphones to the terminal box.For details about pin assignments for the DPH2 card, refer to "2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)".

Terminal Box

(included with the card)

Path_1b

OP1b

Call_1a

DC1aOP1a

DC1b

Path_1a

Call_1b Path_2b

OP2a

OP2b

Call_2a

DC2a

DC2b

Path_2a

Call_2b

Pin Assignments for Terminal Box

To doorphones/door openers

3. Cut and remove the appropriate parts from the cover depending on your preference.

Installation Manual 217

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 218: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4. Make sure to run the connected wires through it. Then, close the cover.

5. Connect the terminal box to the DPH2 card in the PBX using the telephone line cords included with thecard.

To doorphones/door openers

Telephone Line Cord

To DPH2 card

Connection of Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays toDPH4 Card

Use 8-pin and 10-pin terminal block (included with the card) for connection.

218 Installation Manual

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 219: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert the wire intothe side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other door openers, external sensors, and externalrelays.Refer to "2.5.1 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161)" for pin assignments.

Door Opener

External Sensor/External Relay Device

2. Attach the terminal block to the connector of the DPH4 card in the PBX.

To external sensors

To door openers/external relays

Installation Manual 219

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 220: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connection of External Sensors and External Relays to DPH2 CardUse 8-pin and 10-pin terminal block (included with the card) for connection.1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert the wire into

the side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other external sensors and external relays. Referto "2.5.2 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162)" for pin assignments.

External Sensor/External Relay Device

2. Attach the terminal block to the connector of the DPH2 card in the PBX.

To external sensors

To external relays

220 Installation Manual

2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Page 221: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.11 Connection of Peripherals

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

PC CTI Server

PC Printer

BGM/

Music on Hold

Pager:Amplifier/Speaker

Maximum Distance

2 m

Maximum Distance

5 m

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 10 m

ø 0.5 mm: 10 m

ø 0.6 mm: 10 m

CAT 5: 10 m

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 10 m

ø 0.5 mm: 10 m

ø 0.6 mm: 10 m

CAT 5: 10 m

BGM/MOHThe PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Only 1 external music source (e.g., a user-suppliedradio) can be connected to the PBX.

CAUTION• Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug. Otherwise, sound

may only be heard intermittently.• An External Music Jack is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device,

or in Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

NoteWhen the PBX and external music sources are not connected to the same earth, hum noise may be inducedinto Background Music and Music on Hold.

PagerOnly 1 paging device (user-supplied) can be connected to the PBX.

Installation Manual 221

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

Page 222: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

CAUTIONAn External Paging Jack is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device, orin Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

PC/Printer (via RS-232C)The PBX is equipped with an RS-232C interface. This interface provides communication between the PBXand the user-supplied devices such as PC or line printers. The RS-232C port is used for system programming,SMDR, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

CAUTIONTo protect the system, keep the following in mind:1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the RS-232C cross cable (shielded cable) are

conductive. If they are not conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable are firmlyconnected.

2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the PC/Printer using an earthingwire in order to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name FunctionCircuit Type

EIA CCITT

6 9

1 52 RD (RXD) Receive Data BB 104

34

SD (TXD)ER (DTR)

Transmit DataData Terminal Ready

BACD

103108.2

56

SGDR (DSR)

Signal GroundData Set Ready

ABCC

102107

78

RS (RTS)CS (CTS)

Request To SendClear To Send

CACB

105106

Connection ChartsFor connecting a printer/PC with a 9-pin RS-232C connector

PBX (9-pin) Printer/PC (9-pin)

Circuit Type

(EIA)

Signal

NamePin No. Pin No.

Signal

Name

Circuit Type

(EIA)

BB RD (RXD) 2

BA SD (TXD) 3

CD ER (DTR) 4

AB SG 5

CC DR (DSR) 6

CA RS (RTS) 7

CB CS (CTS) 8

2 RD (RXD) BB

3 SD (TXD) BA

4 ER (DTR) CD

5 SG AB

6 DR (DSR) CC

7 RS (RTS) CA

8 CS (CTS) CB

222 Installation Manual

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

Page 223: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

For connecting a printer/PC with a 25-pin RS-232C connector

PBX (9-pin) Printer/PC (25-pin)

Circuit Type

(EIA)

Signal

NamePin No.

Signal

Name

Circuit Type

(EIA)

BB RD (RXD) 2

BA SD (TXD) 3

CD ER (DTR) 4

AB SG 5

CC DR (DSR) 6

CA RS (RTS) 7

CB CS (CTS) 8

1 FG AA

3 RD (RXD) BB

2 SD (TXD) BA

20 ER (DTR) CD

7 SG AB

5 CS (CTS) CB

6 DR (DSR) CC

CF4 RS (RTS)

Pin No.

RS-232C Signals• Receive Data (RXD):…(input)

Conveys signals from the printer or the PC.• Transmit Data (TXD):…(output)

Conveys signals from the unit to the printer or the PC. A "Mark" condition is held unless data or BREAKsignals are being transmitted.

• Data Terminal Ready (DTR):…(output)This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit ER (DTR) ON does not indicatethat communication has been established with the printer or the PC. It is switched OFF when the unit isOFF LINE.

• Signal Ground (SG)Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.

• Data Set Ready (DSR):…(input)An ON condition of circuit DR (DSR) indicates the printer or the PC is ready. Circuit DR (DSR) ON doesnot indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the PC.

• Request To Send (RTS):…(output)This lead is held ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.

• Clear To Send (CTS):…(input)An ON condition of circuit CS (CTS) indicates that the printer or the PC is ready to receive data from theunit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when circuit CS (CTS) is OFF.

• Frame Ground (FG)Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.

PC/CTI Server (via USB version 2.0)The PBX is equipped with a USB interface. This interface provides communication between the PBX and aPC or a CTI server.The PC is used for system programming, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load)functions.The CTI server is used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI. The CTI connectionuses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol.

NoteThe operating system of the PC or CTI server required for third party call control depends on your CTIapplication software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Installation Manual 223

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

Page 224: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

CAUTIONTo protect the system, keep the following in mind:1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the USB cable are conductive. If they are not

conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable are firmly connected.2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the PC/CTI server using an earthing

wire in order to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name

2

3

1

4

1 VBUS

2 USB D-

3 USB D+

4 GND

224 Installation Manual

2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals

Page 225: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.12 Power Failure Connections

2.12.1 Power Failure ConnectionsWhen the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from the current connectionto the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature Guide for furtherinformation.

NoteWhile DC power is provided by the backup batteries, the PBX will remain fully operational and theconnection will not switch to the Power Failure Connection.

Using Analogue Trunk Card and Super Hybrid PortsIn the event of power failure, SLTs connected to Ports 1 and 2 of the Super Hybrid Ports (on the Main Board)are automatically connected to PFT ports 1 and 2 of the first LCOT2/LCOT4 card (installed in the least slotnumber).

NoteEven when the power returns, the conversation established during power failure will be maintained.

Using BRI2 CardLINE 1 and LINE 2 of the BRI2 card can be used for Power Failure Connections.

NoteWhen the power returns, the connection will switch back to normal configuration from the Power FailureConnection, and a trunk conversation established during power failure will be dropped.

To ISDN extension

RJ45

(LINE 1)

RJ45

(LINE 2)To NT11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Set all DIP switches

at "ON" positions.

Accessories and User-supplied ItemsAccessories (included): Extension Bolt ´ 1, Strap ´ 1User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connectors

Installation Manual 225

2.12.1 Power Failure Connections

Page 226: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Switch Settings

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

PFT Setting DIP Set all DIP switches to "ON" positions to use LINE 1 and LINE 2 as aPFT port.LINE 1: Power Failure LINE (NT1)LINE 2: Power Failure EXTN (extension)

RJ45 Connector LINE 1 Pin Assignments

Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 8

TX1(+)RX2(+)

RX1(-)TX2(-)

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

– – Reserved

RJ45 Connector LINE 2 Pin Assignments

Signal Name Level [V] Function

RX2(+)TX1(+)

TX2(-)RX1(-)

1 8

RX2 (+) Receive data 2

TX1 (+) Transmit data 1

TX2 (-) Transmit data 2

RX1 (-) Receive data 1

– – Reserved

226 Installation Manual

2.12.1 Power Failure Connections

Page 227: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2.13 Starting the PBX

2.13.1 Starting the PBXCAUTION

• Before touching the System Initialise Switch, discharge static electricity by touching ground or wearingan earthing strap.

• Once you have started the PBX and if you unplug the PBX, do not perform the following proceduresto start the PBX again. Otherwise, your programmed data is cleared. To restart the PBX, referto "4.1.4 Using the Reset Button".

• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is locatednear the equipment and is easily accessible.

NoticeThe SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the main board before startup.

NoteThe PBX will continue to be powered even if the power switch is turned "OFF".

System Initialisation Procedure1. Slide the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.

Reset Button

System Initialise Switch

RUN Indicator

ALARM Indicator

Installation Manual 227

2.13.1 Starting the PBX

Page 228: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

2. Plug the DC connector of the AC adaptor into DC IN 1.

AC Adaptor

DC Connector

DC IN 1

21

Note• The AC adaptor supplied with the PBX must be connected to DC IN 1. If an AC adaptor is connected

only to DC IN 2, the PBX will not start.• If you need to connect an additional AC adaptor, plug the DC connector of the additional AC adaptor

into DC IN 2.

DC Connector

Additional

AC Adaptor

DC IN 2

AC Adaptor

1 2

228 Installation Manual

2.13.1 Starting the PBX

Page 229: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3. Plug the AC cord into the AC adaptor, and then plug the other end into an AC outlet.

AC Adaptor

AC Cord

To AC outlet

4. Turn on the power switch. The RUN indicator will flash.

Power Switch

Note• For safety reasons, follow the procedures as indicated when turning on the PBX.• For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC cord and the DC cable of the AC adaptor.

5. While the RUN indicator is flashing, slide the System Initialise Switch back to the "NORMAL" position.Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 1 min to 3 min. If successfully executed, theRUN indicator will stop flashing and stay lit.

All data will be cleared, and the PBX as well as all optional service cards (except for the IP-GW4 card) will beinitialised to the default values. The DPTs should show the time as 01:00. The data of the IP-GW4 card willnot be initialised.

IMPORTANTUse only the AC adaptor (Panasonic PSLP1244/Panasonic PSLP1434) and AC cord supplied withthe PBX, or the Additional AC Adaptor (KX-A236).

Installation Manual 229

2.13.1 Starting the PBX

Page 230: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

LED IndicationsIndication Colour Description

RUN Green PBX status indication• OFF: Power Off (includes normal reset)• ON: Power On and running (on-line)• Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up• Flashing (120 times per minute): Starting up or resetting with:

• the System Initialise Switch in "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position• the SD Memory Card not inserted

ALARM Red Alarm indication• OFF: Normal• ON: Alarm (CPU stop, alarm for each optional service card)• Flashing: Alarm (MPR file error in restarting)

Confirming the Trunk ConnectionAfter initialisation, programme the PBX and connect trunks to the PBX.

To confirm that the trunks are successfully connected, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) on a PT, orpress the PT’s S-CO button. You will hear a dial tone if the trunk is available and connected.

Turning off the PBXFor safety reasons, make sure to turn off the power switch before unplugging the PBX. To unplug, follow thereverse steps to plug it in.

230 Installation Manual

2.13.1 Starting the PBX

Page 231: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Section 3

Guide for the Maintenance Console

Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basicinformation of the Maintenance Console.

Installation Manual 231

Page 232: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3.1 Overview

3.1.1 OverviewThe Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Toprogramme and administer the PBX by PC, you need to install the Maintenance Console onto the PC.This manual describes overview and installation of the Maintenance Console only.

System Menu

Menu Bar

NoteThe contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.

232 Installation Manual

3.1.1 Overview

Page 233: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3.2 PC Connection

3.2.1 PC ConnectionSerial Interface Connection

PC

PC

To USB Port

To COM Port

USB Port

RS-232C Port

CAUTIONTo protect the system, keep the following in mind:1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the RS-232C cross cable (shielded cable)/USB

cable are conductive. If they are not conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable arefirmly connected.

2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the PC using an earthing wire inorder to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

NoteFor pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals".

Installation Manual 233

3.2.1 PC Connection

Page 234: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

LAN Connection via IP-GW4 Card

PC

Switching Hub

To network port

RJ45

NoteFor pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "2.3.8 IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480)".

External Modem Connection

To trunk/PBX extensionport assigned as the trunk destination

ModemTo RS-232C port

(25-pin)

External Modem (25-pin)PBX (9-pin)

Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name

RD (RXD)3

SD (TXD)2

ER (DTR)20

DR (DSR)6

2RD (RXD)

3SD (TXD)

4 ER (DTR)

6DR (DSR)

Pin No.

RS-232C Port

(9-pin)

CAUTIONTo protect the system, keep the following in mind:

234 Installation Manual

3.2.1 PC Connection

Page 235: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the RS-232C straight cable (shielded cable)are conductive. If they are not conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable are firmlyconnected.

2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the PC using an earthing wire inorder to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

After connecting the PBX and the external modem, set the power switch of the external modem to "ON", thenthe external modem will be initialised with the default values.The following AT command settings may be required for the modem:• The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal should be ignored.• The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)/Modem flow control should be turned off.• Data compression should be disabled.• Error Correction is not necessary.

Note• An AT command (for initialisation, enabling automatic answer, etc.) can only be programmed by the

Maintenance Console. "AT&F" is stored as the default value.• For more information about the AT command, refer to the external modem’s instructions.

Installation Manual 235

3.2.1 PC Connection

Page 236: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

3.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console

3.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance ConsoleSystem Requirements

Required Operating System• Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows Vista® Business

Minimum Hardware Requirements• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space

Recommended Display Settings• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)

Password SecurityWarning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform the

customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to others.3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you

programme the PBX.4. Change the passwords periodically.5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection

against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system passwords,refer to "1.1.2 Entering Characters" in the PC Programming Manual.

Installing the Maintenance ConsoleNote

• Make sure to install and use the latest version of the Maintenance Console.• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in

as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business, you must be logged in

as a user in the "Administrators" group.• To connect the PC to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed. Follow the

instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver. When the PBX is first connected to the PCvia USB, you may be asked to select the appropriate USB driver. Browse for and select the KX-TDAUSB driver that was installed previously.

1. Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC.2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

236 Installation Manual

3.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

Page 237: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (QuickSetup)

When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBXfor the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. DuringQuick Setup, you will set up the basic items. For details about the basic items, refer to "2.3.4 Quick Setup" inthe Feature Guide.

1. Connect the PC to the PBX with a USB cable.

2. Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu.

3. "Information before programming" appears.a. Carefully read this important additional information,

which includes updates to this and other manuals.b. Click OK to close this window.

4. a. Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default:INSTALLER).The Programmer Code authorises different program-ming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available whenyou start the Maintenance Console with the InstallerLevel Programmer Code.

NoteThere are 2 other Programmer Codes with limitedauthorisation: Administrator Level (default: AD-MIN), and User Level (default: USER).

b. Click OK.

5. Click Connect.

6. a. Select KX-TDA15/30 from PBX Model.b. Select the USB tab.c. Enter the system password for installer (default: 1234).d. Click Connect.

NoteTo connect to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB drivermust be installed on the PC, as explained abovein "Installing the Maintenance Console".

Installation Manual 237

3.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

Page 238: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

7. When country/area data do not match:a. Click OK to replace the country/area data of the PBX.

Replacement may take several minutes to complete.b. Follow the procedure described in "2.13.1 Starting the

PBX" and restart the PBX.c. Repeat step 5 to reconnect the Maintenance Console

to the PBX.

8. Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard and assignthe basic items (Quick Setup).

The system menu appears. You may now begin program-ming the PBX.

Notice1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system

data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset forsome reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to theSD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon beforeresetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBXautomatically saves the system data.

2. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby modewhile the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX. To perform either of the operations above,first close the connection to the PBX.

CAUTIONDo not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX tofail to start when you try to restart the system.

238 Installation Manual

3.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

Page 239: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Section 4

Troubleshooting

This section provides information on the PBX andtelephone troubleshooting.

Installation Manual 239

Page 240: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4.1 Troubleshooting

4.1.1 InstallationPROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Extension does not operate. Bad extension card. • Exchange the card for a known workingone.

Bad connection between thePBX and telephone.

• Take the telephone and plug it into thesame extension port using a short tele-phone cord. If the telephone works,then the connection between the PBXand the telephone must be repaired.

A telephone with an A-A1 re-lay is connected.

• Use a 2-wire cord.• Set the A-A1 relay switch of the tele-

phone to the "OUT" or "OFF" position.

Bad telephone. • Take the telephone and plug it into an-other extension port that is working. Ifthe telephone does not work, replacethe telephone.

The number of terminal equip-ment exceeds the capacity ofthe PBX with the supplied ACadaptor only.

• Connect an additional AC adaptor.

The PBX does not operateproperly.

• Press the Reset Button (referto "4.1.4 Using the Reset Button").

• Turn off the power switch, and then turnit back on.

• Turn off the power switch, and then un-plug the PBX. After 5 minutes, plug thePBX back in, and turn the power switchback on.

Noise on external paging. Induced noise on the wire be-tween the PBX and the ampli-fier.

• Use a shielded cable as the connectionwire between the PBX and amplifier. Ashort shielded cable is recommended.

Distorted external music. Excessive input level from ex-ternal music source.

• Decrease the output level of the exter-nal music source by using the volumecontrol on the music source.

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voiceand Live Call Screening (LCS)do not function as set when us-ing a Wireless Phone(KX-T7880/KX-T7885/KX-TD7894/KX-TD7895).

Voice-calling mode andHands-free mode with LCSare not available with WirelessPhones.

• Switch the calling mode to ring-calling.• Set the LCS mode to "Private".

The ALARM indicator on thefront of the cabinet turns on red.

A major system error occurs inthe PBX.

• See the error log using the Mainte-nance Console (refer to "4.1.5 Trou-bleshooting by Error Log").

240 Installation Manual

4.1.1 Installation

Page 241: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4.1.2 Connection

Connection between the PBX and a PT:

Connection between the PBX and an SLT:

Connection between the PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:

CAUSE

The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

SOLUTION

Use the correct cord (the

inner 2 wires are for T/R and

the outer 2 wires are for

D1/D2).D1TR

D2

D1 TR D2

PBX

PBX

PBX

Extension

CAUSE

The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.

SOLUTION

Use the correct cord (the

inner 2 wires are for T/R).

•D1TR

D2

TR

Extension

CAUSE

The "T" is connected to the "R".

SOLUTION

Reverse the connections of

the T/R.

D1TR

D2

TR

Extension

Can you dial

an extension?

(Continued on the next page.)

No

Yes

If a telephone equipped

with an A-A1 relay is

connected to the PBX,

set the A-A1 relay switch

of the telephone to

"OFF".

Installation Manual 241

4.1.2 Connection

Page 242: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Connection between the trunk and the PBX:

CAUSE

Trunk is connected to the T2/T1.

Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.

SOLUTION

Reconnect the trunk to

the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the

telephone jack using

2-conductor wiring.T2 R1T1R2

Trunk PBX

PBXTrunk

T2 R1T1R2

(Continued from the

previous page.)

Can you dial

out on a

trunk?

No

242 Installation Manual

4.1.2 Connection

Page 243: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4.1.3 OperationPROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• When using the speaker-phone on an APT, nothingis audible.

• The HANDSET/HEAD-SET selector is set to the"HEADSET" position.

• When the headset is not used, set theHANDSET/HEADSET selector to the"HANDSET" position.

• When using the speaker-phone/monitor mode witha DPT, nothing is audible.

• The "HEADSET" mode isselected by Personal Pro-gramming, "Handset/Headset Selection".

• When the headset is not used, select the"HANDSET" mode by Personal Program-ming.

• The PT does not ring. • The ringer volume is off. • Turn on the ringer volume.

• During a power failure,extensions connected toports 1 and 2 of Super Hy-brid Ports do not operate.

• A DPT or APT is connec-ted to the extension port.

• The dialling mode (tone orpulse) is incorrect.

• Disconnect the DPT or APT and connectan SLT.

• Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other po-sition.

• Originating an outsidecall, call transfer, or con-ference cannot be per-formed.

• The corresponding CObutton does not exist onthe PT.

• Programme the CO button. Referto "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the FeatureGuide.

• The LED of the CS doesnot change to Green ON.

• CS is not connected prop-erly.

• Make sure that the cable is connectedproperly with correct pin assignments. Al-so, make sure that the cable does notmake short circuits.

• CS is not set for normaloperation.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

• The status of the port thatthe CS is connected to isOut of Service.

• Change the port status from Out of Serv-ice to In Service using the MaintenanceConsole.

<KX-TDA0158 only>• Both KX-TDA0158 and

KX-TDA0155 CSs areconnected to the samecard, and theKX-TDA0158 CSs areconnected to higher-num-bered pins on the cardthan the KX-TDA0155CSs.

• Connect the KX-TDA0158 CSs to low-er-numbered pins on the card than theKX-TDA0155 CSs.

• Connect the KX-TDA0158 andKX-TDA0155 CSs to different cards.

• The LED of the CS staysRed ON during normaloperation.

• CS malfunction • Replace the CS.

• "CLEAR SCAN DATA" isdisplayed on the PS’sscreen after turning on thePS.

• The PS cannot be usedfor normal operationwhen scan data is storedon the PS.

• Clear the scan data (refer to "2.7.5 SiteSurvey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590" or "2.9.5 Site Survey").

Installation Manual 243

4.1.3 Operation

Page 244: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• Cannot register the PS. • Wrong Personal Identifi-cation Number (PIN) isregistered to the PS.

• Enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS.

• CS is not connected prop-erly.

• Make sure that the cable is connectedproperly with correct pin assignments. Al-so, make sure that the cable does notmake short circuits.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

• PS becomes out of range.• Cannot make calls using

the PS.

• CS is not working. • Make sure that the cable is connectedproperly with correct pin assignments. Al-so, make sure that the cable does notmake short circuits.

• Switch all DIP switches off.

• Location of CS is notgood.

• Locate the CS properly (referto "2.7.5 Site Survey Using theKX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590", "2.8.5 Site Survey",or "2.9.5 Site Survey" ).

• Access system of the PSis not properly set.

• Change the access system setting of thePS to the appropriate system or automat-ic.

• Noise is frequent whileusing the PS.

• Conversations discon-nect while using the PS

• "NO SERVICE" is dis-played on the PS’sscreen.

• Call handover is not work-ing.

• PS is out of CS coveragearea.

• Locate the CS properly (referto "2.7.5 Site Survey Using theKX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590", "2.8.5 Site Survey",or "2.9.5 Site Survey" ).

• The CS is not busy (i.e.,the status of the LED isnot Moderate GreenFlashing), but calls can-not be made or received.

• There is noise during aphone call.

• CSs are located too closetogether in the same area.

• Reduce the number of CSs in the area, orincrease the distance between CSs (referto "2.7.5 Site Survey Using theKX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590", "2.8.5 Site Survey",or "2.9.5 Site Survey" ).

• PS stays out of servicewhen the CS status ischanged from Out ofService to In Service.

• It may take about 20 s forCS to start up after thestatus has been changedto In Service.

• Wait until the CS starts up.

• The maximum number ofPS calls that a high-den-sity CS supports cannotbe made.

• Poor connection • Make sure that a 4-pair cable is used forconnection.

244 Installation Manual

4.1.3 Operation

Page 245: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4.1.4 Using the Reset ButtonIf the PBX does not operate properly, use the Reset Button. Before using the Reset Button, try the systemfeature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.

CAUTIONIn order to avoid possible corruption of data on the SD Memory Card, please ensure that the "SDACCESS" LED is off before pressing the Reset Button.

Note• When the System Initialise Switch is set to "NORMAL", pressing the Reset Button causes the following:

– Camp-on is cleared.– Calls on hold are terminated.– Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.– Calls in progress are terminated.– Call park is cleared.Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.

• Be aware that pressing the Reset Button with the System Initialise Switch in the "SYSTEMINITIALIZE" position clears all data stored in the PBX. Do not perform this operation unless you intendto delete all data from the PBX.

OperationIf the PBX does not operate properly:1. Slide the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position.2. Press the Reset Button for about 1 second.

Reset Button

System Initialise Switch

LED

Installation Manual 245

4.1.4 Using the Reset Button

Page 246: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error LogWhen a major system error occurs in the PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of the cabinet turns on red,and the system logs the error information.

Error Log Display FormatBelow is the display format of the error log. For information about how to view the error log using theMaintenance Console, refer to "2.6.8 Utility—Error Log" in the PC Programming Manual.

Example: Maintenance Console

1 2 4 5 6

3 7

Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

04/01/01 10:37AM MJ ALM #000 10000 MPR WDT overflow

04/01/01 11:07AM MN ALM #010 10000 AC power down

04/01/01 03:55PM MN ALM #392 10401 Clock master card selected

1 2 3 4 5 6

Description

Item Description

1 Date The date of the error detection.

2 Time The time of the error detection.

3 Level Minor (MN ALM) Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of systemoperation.

Major (MJ ALM) Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole sys-tem, or result in system failure.

4 Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.

246 Installation Manual

4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

Page 247: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Item Description

5 Sub Code The 5-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (1XXYY).• 1: Cabinet number• XX: Slot number

00 to 11(00: MPR card slot; 01: Super hybrid ports; 02 to 11: Slotsfor optional service cards)

• YY: Physical port number– For optional service cards:

Physical port number (01 to 16) will be displayed.– For optional service cards that are installed in Slots 08

to 11:Sub slot number 1 + port number (1 to 4) will be dis-played as follows:• Sub slot 1: 11 to 14

NoteWhen there are no parameters for the slot and physical portnumbers, XX and YY will be displayed as "00".Example: Sub code for MPR card = 10000

6 Error Message A description of the error.

7 Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

Installation Manual 247

4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

Page 248: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

248 Installation Manual

4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

Page 249: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Section 5

Appendix

Installation Manual 249

Page 250: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5.1 Revision History

5.1.1 PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxxNew Options

• System Components Table

– KX-TDA3182 3-Port DID Card (DID3)

– KX-TDA3183 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT2)

– KX-TDA3105 Memory Expansion Card (MEC)

Changed Contents• 1.4.3 System Capacity

250 Installation Manual

5.1.1 PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxx

Page 251: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5.1.2 PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxxNew Options

• System Components Table

– KX-TDA3283 1-Port BRI Card (BRI1)

– KX-TDA3820 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade

– KX-TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version

Changed Contents• 1.4.3 System Capacity• 2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Installation Manual 251

5.1.2 PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx

Page 252: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5.1.3 PSMPR Software File Version 2.2xxxNew Options

• System Components Table

– KX-TDA3192 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (SVM2)

– KX-TDA3283 1-Port BRI Card (BRI1)

– KX-TDA3820 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade

– KX-TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version

Changed Contents• 1.4.3 System Capacity• 2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

252 Installation Manual

5.1.3 PSMPR Software File Version 2.2xxx

Page 253: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5.1.4 PSMPR Software File Version 3.0xxxNew Options

• System Components Table

– KX-TDA3188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1)

Changed Contents• 1.4.3 System Capacity• 3.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

Installation Manual 253

5.1.4 PSMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

Page 254: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5.1.5 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxxNew Options

• System Components Table

– KX-TDA3450 4-Channel SIP Trunk Card (SIP-GW4)

– KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4)

– KX-TDA3470 4-Channel VoIP Extension Card (IP-EXT4)

Changed Contents• 1.4.3 System Capacity• 2.3.8 IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480)• 3.2.1 PC Connection

254 Installation Manual

5.1.5 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx

Page 255: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

5.1.6 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxxNew Options

• System Components Table

– KX-TDA3194 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (ESVM2)

– KX-TDA0151 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC Card for 2.4GHz Portable Station

– KX-TDA0155 DECT 6.0 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC Cardfor DECT 6.0 Portable Station

– KX-TDA0158CE 8-Channel High-density Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or a DLCCard for DECT Portable Station

– KX-TDA0158 DECT 6.0 8-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a Super Hybrid Port or a DLC Cardfor DECT 6.0 Portable Station

– KX-T7765 Doorphone

New Contents• 2.9 Connection of DECT 6.0 Portable Stations

Changed Contents• 1.4.3 System Capacity• 2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays• 3.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

Installation Manual 255

5.1.6 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx

Page 256: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

256 Installation Manual

5.1.6 PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx

Page 257: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Index

Installation Manual 257

Page 258: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Numerics1-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA3283) 24, 812-Channel Message Card (KX-TDA3191) 23, 1032-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card(KX-TDA3192) 24, 1042-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card(KX-TDA3194) 24, 1052-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA3183) 23, 712-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA3280) 24, 782-Port Doorphone Card (German Type)(KX-TDA3162) 23, 992.4 GHz Portable Station, After Site Survey 1682.4 GHz Portable Station, Before Site Survey 1612.4 GHz Portable Station, Connecting a CS 1692.4 GHz Portable Station, Procedure Overview 1552.4 GHz Portable Station, Site Planning 1572.4 GHz Portable Station, Site Survey 1643-Port DID Card (KX-TDA3182) 23, 734-Channel SIP Trunk Card (KX-TDA3450) 24, 864-Channel VoIP DSP Card (KX-TDA3451) 24, 884-Channel VoIP Extension Card (KX-TDA3470) 24, 944-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA3480) 24, 844-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA3180) 23, 694-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TDA3193) 24, 724-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA3171) 23, 894-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TDA3161) 23, 964-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card(KX-TDA3173) 23, 918-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA3166) 23, 1028-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA3172) 23, 928-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card(KX-TDA3174) 23, 93

AAbout the software version of your PBX 13AC Adaptor Capacity 32AC Adaptor Selection (With BRI Extension Port) 31AC Adaptor Selection (Without BRI Extension Port) 31Additional AC Adaptor (KX-A236) 24Appendix 249

BBackup Battery Connection 44Backup Power Supply Duration 44BGM 221BRI1 Card (KX-TDA3283) 81BRI2 Card (KX-TDA3280) 78

CCable Distance 109Cable Handling 52Calculation Example 30, 32Changed Contents 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255Characteristics 27CID4 Card (KX-TDA3193) 72Components, System 2Connecting Backup Batteries 45Connection Diagram for External Sensors and ExternalRelays 98, 101Connection Diagram, System 21

Connector Types 56Cover, Closing 39Cover, Opening 38CS (for 2.4 GHz Portable Station) 169CS (for DECT 6.0 Portable Station) 199CS (for DECT Portable Station) 140CTI Server Connection (via USB version 2.0) 223CTI—First Party Call Control 121CTI—Third Party Call Control 223

DDECT 6.0 Portable Station, After Site Survey 198DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Before Site Survey 189DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Connecting a CS 199DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Connection 181DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Procedure Overview 183DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Site Planning 185DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Site Survey 194DECT Portable Station, After Site Survey 139DECT Portable Station, Before Site Survey 130DECT Portable Station, Connecting a CS 140DECT Portable Station, Procedure Overview 124DECT Portable Station, RF Specification 122DECT Portable Station, Site Planning 126DECT Portable Station, Site Survey 135DID3 Card (KX-TDA3182) 73Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection 114Digital XDP 114Digital XDP Connection, Using a ModularT-Adaptor 114, 116, 118Digital XDP Connection, Using an EXtra DevicePort 115, 117, 119DLC4 Card (KX-TDA3171) 89DLC8 Card (KX-TDA3172) 91Door Opener 96, 99, 211Doorphone 96, 99, 211DPH2 Card (KX-TDA3162) 99DPH4 Card (KX-TDA3161) 96

EE-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA3188) 23, 74E1 Card (KX-TDA3188) 74ECHO8 Card (KX-TDA3166) 102Error Log 246ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA3194) 105EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA3168) 106Extension Caller ID Card (KX-TDA3168) 23, 106External Relay 96, 99, 211External Sensor 96, 99, 211EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode 111, 114

FFerrite Core 58First Party Call Control CTI Connection 121Frame Earth Connection 43Front Cover, Attachment 39Front Cover, Removal 39

IInstallation Precautions 34

258 Installation Manual

Index

Page 259: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

IP-EXT4 Card (KX-TDA3470) 94IP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3480) 84

KKX-A236 (Additional AC Adaptor) 24KX-TDA3105 (Memory Expansion Card) 23, 107KX-TDA3161 (4-Port Doorphone Card) 23, 96KX-TDA3162 (2-Port Doorphone Card (GermanType)) 23, 99KX-TDA3166 (8-Channel Echo Canceller Card) 23, 102KX-TDA3168 (Extension Caller ID Card) 23, 106KX-TDA3171 (4-Port Digital Extension Card) 23, 89KX-TDA3172 (8-Port Digital Extension Card) 23, 92KX-TDA3173 (4-Port Single Line Telephone ExtensionCard) 23, 91KX-TDA3174 (8-Port Single Line Telephone ExtensionCard) 23, 93KX-TDA3180 (4-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 23, 69KX-TDA3182 (3-Port DID Card) 23, 73KX-TDA3183 (2-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 23, 71KX-TDA3188 (E-1 Trunk Card) 23, 74KX-TDA3191 (2-Channel Message Card) 23, 103KX-TDA3192 (2-Channel Simplified Voice MessageCard) 24, 104KX-TDA3193 (4-Port Caller ID Card) 24, 72KX-TDA3194 (2-Channel Simplified Voice MessageCard) 24, 105KX-TDA3196 (Remote Card) 24, 108KX-TDA3280 (2-Port BRI Card) 24, 78KX-TDA3283 (1-Port BRI Card) 24, 81KX-TDA3450 (4-Channel SIP Trunk Card) 24, 86KX-TDA3451 (4-Channel VoIP DSP Card) 24, 88KX-TDA3470 (4-Channel VoIP Extension Card) 24, 94KX-TDA3480 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 24, 84KX-TDA3820 (SD Memory Card for SoftwareUpgrade) 24, 41KX-TDA3920 (SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade toEnhanced Version) 24, 41

LLCOT2 Card (KX-TDA3183) 71LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA3180) 69LED Indications, PBX 230

MMain Unit 20Main Unit, Construction 20Maintenance Console 232Maintenance Console, Connection 233Maintenance Console, Installation 236Maintenance Console, Overview 232Maintenance Console, Password Security 236Maintenance Console, Quick Setup 237Maintenance Console, System Requirements 236Master DPT, Digital XDP 114Maximum Terminal Equipment 28Maximum Trunk and VoIP Line 28MEC Card (KX-TDA3105) 107MEC Card Calculation 30Memory Expansion Card (KX-TDA3105) 23, 107MOH 221

MSG2 Card (KX-TDA3191) 103

NNames and Locations 37New Contents 255New Options 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255

OOptional Equipment 23Optional Service Card, Installation 47Optional Service Card, Removal 55

PPager 221Panasonic Proprietary Telephones, Compatible 3Panasonic Proprietary Telephones, Incompatible 3Parallel Connection of the Extensions 111Parallel Connection, Using a Modular T-Adaptor 112Parallel Connection, Using an EXtra Device Port 112Parallel Mode 111, 114Password Security 236PC Connection (via RS-232C) 222PC Connection (via USB version 2.0) 223Power Failure Connections 225Printer Connection (via RS-232C) 222PSMPR Software File Version 1.1xxx 250PSMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx 251PSMPR Software File Version 2.2xxx 252PSMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx 253PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx 254PSMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx 255

QQuick Setup 237

RRemote Card (KX-TDA3196) 24, 108Reset Button 245Revision History 250RF Specification, DECT 6.0 Portable Station 182RF Specification, DECT Portable Station 122RMT Card (KX-TDA3196) 108RUN Indicator 227

SSafety Installation Instructions 34SD Memory Card 41SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade(KX-TDA3820) 24, 41SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version(KX-TDA3920) 24, 41SIP-DSP4 Card (KX-TDA3451) 88SIP-GW4 Card (KX-TDA3450) 86Site Planning, 2.4 GHz Portable Station 157Site Planning, DECT 6.0 Portable Station 185Site Planning, DECT Portable Station 126Site Survey, 2.4 GHz Portable Station 164Site Survey, DECT 6.0 Portable Station 194

Installation Manual 259

Index

Page 260: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Site Survey, DECT Portable Station 135Slave DPT, Digital XDP 114SLC4 Card (KX-TDA3173) 91SLC8 Card (KX-TDA3174) 92Slot Position 46Slot Restrictions 46Specifications 25Specifications, Characteristics 27Specifications, General Description 25Specifications, System Capacity 28Starting the PBX 227Surge Protector Installation 66SVM2 Card (KX-TDA3192) 104System Capacity 28System Components Table 2System Connection Diagram 21System Highlights 18System Initialisation Procedure 227System Initialise Switch 227, 245System Requirements 236

TTerminal Equipment, Maximum Number 28Troubleshooting, by Error Log 246Troubleshooting, Connection 241Troubleshooting, Installation 240Troubleshooting, Operation 243Troubleshooting, Using the Reset Button 245Trunk Connection 230Trunk, Maximum Number 28Turning off the PBX 230

UUnpacking 36

VVoIP Line, Maximum Number 28

WWall Mounting (AC Adaptor) 62Wall Mounting (CS) 150, 176Wall Mounting (KX-TDA30) 59Wall Mounting Reference (AC Adaptor) 65Wall Mounting Reference (CS) 180Wall Mounting Reference (KX-TDA30) 59Wiring Precautions 34

260 Installation Manual

Index

Page 261: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

25

0 m

m

24

0 m

m

65 mm

130 mm

12

0 m

m

Reference for Wall Mounting

Install a screw here.

Install a

screw here.

Install a

screw here.

Note

Make sure to set the print size to correspond

with the size of this page. If the dimensions of

the paper output still deviate slightly from the

measurements indicated here, use the

measurements indicated here.

Page 262: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

The KX-TDA30E, KX-TDA30NE, KX-TDA30GR, and KX-TDA30CE are designed to

interwork with the:

• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries

• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate

access

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that

this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio

& Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.

Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available

for download by visiting:

http://www.doc.panasonic.de

Contact to Authorised Representative:

Panasonic Testing Centre

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Page 263: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

Installation Manual 263

Notes

Page 264: Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA30 - Téléphonie 2000 · Hybrid IP-PBX Installation Manual SD Logo is a trademark. ... KX-TDA3451 4-Channel VoIP DSP Card (SIP-DSP4) KX-TDA3480 4-Channel VoIP

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

PSQX3456VA

Copyright:

This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use

only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic

Communications Co., Ltd.

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2005

KK0505TM4098

For Future Reference

Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.

The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record

the model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to

aid in identification in the event of theft.

Note

MODEL NO.

SERIAL NO.

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER'S ADDRESS

DEALER'S TEL. NO.